Mary R.
How to remove the battery from a Nikon Z 50 camera?
Turn the camera off, open the battery-chamber cover, and press the battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release and remove the battery.
Nikon Z50 Reference Manual
Nikon Z50 is a digital camera that offers a wide range of features and capabilities for both amateur and professional photographers. With its advanced shooting options, the i Menu, and menu guide, the Z50 makes it easy to capture stunning images and videos. Additionally, the camera's wireless connections to computers, smartphones, and tablets make it easy to share your photos and videos with others.
PDF
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
• Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.
• To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
“For Your Safety” (page xxii).
• After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible place for future reference.
En
Choose from 2 different manuals.
For a guide to all aspects of camera operation, read:
The Reference Manual (this manual)
In addition to the material covered in the User’s
Manual supplied with the camera, the Reference
Manual explores applied photography, details the options available in the camera menus, and covers such topics as connecting the camera to other devices.
Among the topics covered in the Reference Manual are :
• Advanced shooting options
• The i Menu
• Menu guide
• Wireless connections to computers, smartphones, and tablets
• Connecting to other devices
• Flash photography using optional flash units
The Reference Manual can also be viewed online in html format.
nikon online manual Z 50 https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/z50/en/ ii
Z 50 Model Name: N1912
For a guide to basic shooting and playback, read:
The User’s Manual (included)
Master basic camera operations and features.
Outline :
• Table of Contents
• Menu List
• Getting to Know the Camera
• First Steps
• Basic Photography and Playback
• Basic Settings
• Troubleshooting
• Technical Notes
• Index iii
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
BF-N1 body cap
DK-30 rubber eyecup
(comes attached to camera,
Camera
EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal cover
MH-32 battery charger (plug adapter supplied in countries or regions where required; shape depends on country of sale)
Warranty
User’s Manual
UC-E21 USB cable (
Memory cards are sold separately.
Purchasers of the lens kit option should confirm that the package also includes a lens
(manuals for the lens may also be provided).
iv
The Nikon Download Center
Visit the Nikon download center to download firmware updates,
ViewNX-i and other Nikon software, and manuals for Nikon products including cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and flash units.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
About This Manual
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and conventions are used:
D This icon marks notes, information that should be read before using this product.
A This icon marks tips, additional information you may find helpful when using this product.
0 This icon marks references to other sections in this manual.
Menu items, options, and messages that appear in the camera displays are shown in bold . Throughout this manual, the display in camera monitor and viewfinder during shooting is referred to as the “shooting display”; in most cases, the illustrations show the monitor.
This camera uses SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, referred to throughout this manual as “memory cards”.
Throughout this manual, smartphones and tablets are referred to as
“smart devices”.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions
in “For Your Safety” ( 0 xxii).
v
vi
Table of Contents
Package Contents ........................................................................ iv
Menu List ................................................................................... xviii
For Your Safety .......................................................................... xxii
Notices........................................................................................ xxvi
Getting to Know the Camera
Parts of the Camera ...................................................................... 1
The Monitor and Viewfinder...............................................................5
Camera Controls............................................................................ 7
The Monitor Mode Button...................................................................8
The Command Dials ..............................................................................9
The S
(ISO Sensitivity) Button .................................................... 10
The E
(Exposure Compensation) Button.................................... 11
The DISP
Button..................................................................................... 18
The X and W
Buttons................................................................... 20
The A ( L
) Button ............................................................................. 20
The G
Button.................................................................................... 21
The i Button ( i
Icon)........................................................................ 24
The Function Buttons ( Fn1 and Fn2
)............................................... 27
The Flash Pop-Up Control................................................................. 29
First Steps
Attach the Camera Strap ........................................................... 30
Charge the Battery...................................................................... 31
The Battery Charger............................................................................ 31
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card.................................... 32
Attach a Lens................................................................................ 36
Turn the Camera On ................................................................... 38
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs ( b
Mode) ................................................ 40
Shooting Movies ( b
Mode)....................................................... 44
Basic Playback.............................................................................. 48
Deleting Unwanted Pictures ........................................................... 50
Basic Settings
Choosing a Focus Mode.................................................................... 51
The Touch Shutter............................................................................... 59
White Balance .............................................................................. 63
Silent Photography..................................................................... 67
Rating Pictures............................................................................. 69
Protecting Pictures from Deletion ........................................... 70
Shooting Controls
The Mode Dial.............................................................................. 71
P
: Programmed Auto .......................................................................... 72
S
: Shutter-Priority Auto ...................................................................... 72
A
: Aperture-Priority Auto................................................................... 73
M
User Settings: U1 and U2
Modes ...................................................... 78
vii
viii h
(Scene Modes) ..............................................................................80
k
Portrait .......................................................................................81
l
Landscape.................................................................................81
p
Child............................................................................................81
m
Sports..........................................................................................82
n
Close up.....................................................................................82
o
Night Portrait...........................................................................82
r
Night Landscape ....................................................................83
s
Party/Indoor.............................................................................83
t
Beach/Snow .............................................................................83
d
Sunset.........................................................................................84
e
Dusk/Dawn...............................................................................84
f
Pet Portrait ...............................................................................84
g
Candlelight.................................................................................85
j
Blossom......................................................................................85
z
Autumn Colors ........................................................................85
0
Food .............................................................................................86
q
(Special Effect Modes) ...............................................................87
4
Night Vision..............................................................................88
V
Super Vivid................................................................................88
T
Pop ............................................................................................88
U
Photo Illustration....................................................................89
5
Toy Camera Effect ..................................................................89
6
Miniature Effect ......................................................................90
7
Selective Color ........................................................................90
1
Silhouette..................................................................................91
2
High Key ....................................................................................91
3
Low Key .....................................................................................91
The S
(ISO Sensitivity) Button...............................................96
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control.............................................................97
The E
(Exposure Compensation) Button................................98
The A ( L
) Button................................................................... 100
Autoexposure (AE) Lock ................................................................. 100
The Built-In Flash.......................................................................103
Flash Compensation.........................................................................107
The i Menu
Using the i
Menu ......................................................................110
The Photo-Mode i
Menu.........................................................111
Set Picture Control ............................................................................112
Wi-Fi Connection ...............................................................................128
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................129
The Movie-Mode i
Menu.........................................................137
Set Picture Control ............................................................................138
Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality.............................139
Microphone Sensitivity....................................................................141
Wind Noise Reduction .....................................................................142
Wi-Fi Connection ...............................................................................143
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................143
ix
x
More About Playback
Viewing Pictures ....................................................................... 145
Full-Frame Playback ......................................................................... 145
Thumbnail Playback......................................................................... 146
Photo Information.................................................................... 147
The i
Button: Playback............................................................ 155
Select to Send/Deselect.................................................................. 157
Choose Start/End Point................................................................... 158
Save Current Frame.......................................................................... 161
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom .................................. 162
Deleting Pictures ...................................................................... 164
During Playback................................................................................. 164
The Playback Menu .......................................................................... 165
Menu Guide
Defaults ...................................................................................... 167
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Images .......................... 178
Playback Folder......................................................................... 179
Playback Display Options...................................................... 179
Image Review ............................................................................ 180
After Delete ................................................................................ 180
Rotate Tall ................................................................................... 181
Slide Show .................................................................................. 182
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options .............. 184
Reset Photo Shooting Menu ................................................ 185
Storage Folder........................................................................... 185
File Naming ................................................................................ 189
Choose Image Area ................................................................. 189
Image Quality ............................................................................ 190
Image Size................................................................................... 190
NEF (RAW) Recording ............................................................. 191
ISO Sensitivity Settings...........................................................192
White Balance ............................................................................194
Set Picture Control ...................................................................200
Manage Picture Control .........................................................202
Color Space.................................................................................205
Active D-Lighting......................................................................205
Long Exposure NR ....................................................................206
High ISO NR ................................................................................206
Vignette Control .......................................................................207
Diffraction Compensation.....................................................207
Auto Distortion Control..........................................................207
Flicker Reduction Shooting...................................................208
Metering ......................................................................................208
Flash Control ..............................................................................209
Flash Mode..................................................................................211
Flash Compensation................................................................212
Release Mode.............................................................................212
Focus Mode ................................................................................212
AF-Area Mode ............................................................................212
Optical VR ....................................................................................212
Auto Bracketing ........................................................................213
Multiple Exposure ....................................................................223
HDR (High Dynamic Range)..................................................230
Interval Timer Shooting .........................................................235
Time-Lapse Movie ....................................................................245
Silent Photography ..................................................................252
1
The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options ...253
Reset Movie Shooting Menu ................................................254
File Naming.................................................................................254
Frame Size/Frame Rate...........................................................254
Movie Quality.............................................................................254
Movie File Type .........................................................................254
ISO Sensitivity Settings...........................................................255
White Balance ............................................................................255
xi
xii
Set Picture Control................................................................... 256
Manage Picture Control......................................................... 256
Active D-Lighting ..................................................................... 256
High ISO NR ................................................................................ 256
Vignette Control ....................................................................... 257
Diffraction Compensation .................................................... 257
Auto Distortion Control ......................................................... 257
Flicker Reduction...................................................................... 257
Metering...................................................................................... 258
Release Mode (Save Frame) ................................................. 258
Focus Mode................................................................................ 258
AF-Area Mode............................................................................ 258
Optical VR.................................................................................... 259
Electronic VR .............................................................................. 259
Microphone Sensitivity .......................................................... 259
Attenuator .................................................................................. 260
Frequency Response............................................................... 260
Wind Noise Reduction............................................................ 260
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings............ 261
Reset Custom Settings ........................................................... 264
a8: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator......................................... 268
a9: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode.................................... 269
b: Metering/Exposure..................................................................270
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl ...........................................270
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation ......................................270
b3: Center-Weighted Area ....................................................271
b4: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure ........................................271
c: Timers/AE Lock ..........................................................................272
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L..........................................272
c2: Self-Timer..............................................................................272
c3: Power Off Delay..................................................................273
d: Shooting/Display......................................................................274
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed...............................................274
d2: Max. Continuous Release ...............................................274
d3: Exposure Delay Mode......................................................274
d4: Shutter Type........................................................................275
d5: Limit Selectable Image Area..........................................275
d6: File Number Sequence ....................................................276
d7: Apply Settings to Live View...........................................277
d8: Framing Grid Display .......................................................277
d9: Peaking Highlights............................................................277
d10: View All in Continuous Mode .....................................277
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................278
e1: Flash Sync Speed ...............................................................278
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................279
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash...............................................279
e4: Auto c
ISO Sensitivity Control ......................................279
e5: Bracketing Order................................................................280
f1: Customize i
Menu ...........................................................281
f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)...........................................282
f3: Custom Controls (Playback)............................................288
f4: Customize Command Dials.............................................290
f5: Release Button to Use Dial ..............................................292
f6: Reverse Indicators ..............................................................292
xiii
xiv
g1: Customize i
Menu ......................................................... 293
g2: Custom Controls ............................................................... 294
g5: Highlight Display .............................................................. 300
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup......................................... 301
Format Memory Card ............................................................. 302
Save User Settings ................................................................... 302
Reset User Settings.................................................................. 302
Language .................................................................................... 302
Time Zone and Date................................................................ 303
Monitor Brightness.................................................................. 303
Viewfinder Brightness ............................................................ 304
Viewfinder Color Balance ...................................................... 305
Information Display................................................................. 306
AF Fine-Tune.............................................................................. 307
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ..................................................... 308
Image Comment ...................................................................... 310
Copyright Information ........................................................... 311
Beep Options ............................................................................. 312
Touch Controls.......................................................................... 312
Self-Portrait Mode.................................................................... 313
Location Data Display............................................................. 313
Airplane Mode........................................................................... 313
Connect to Smart Device ...................................................... 314
Connect to PC............................................................................ 316
Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options...................................... 319
Conformity Marking................................................................ 320
Energy Saving............................................................................ 321
Slot Empty Release Lock........................................................ 321
Reset All Settings...................................................................... 322
Firmware Version ..................................................................... 322
N
The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies ...........323
NEF (RAW) Processing.............................................................326
D-Lighting ...................................................................................332
Quick Retouch ...........................................................................332
Red-Eye Correction ..................................................................333
Straighten....................................................................................333
Distortion Control.....................................................................334
Perspective Control .................................................................335
Image Overlay............................................................................336
Trim Movie ..................................................................................339
Side-by-Side Comparison ......................................................339
O My Menu/ m
Recent Settings..............................................341
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Network Options .......................................................................346
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi.......................................347
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You.............................................................347
The Wireless Transmitter Utility ...................................................347
Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes.....................................348
Connecting in Access-Point Mode ..............................................349
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode.............................................353
Uploading Pictures............................................................................360
Disconnecting and Reconnecting ...............................................364
Connecting to Smart Devices .................................................365
The SnapBridge App.........................................................................365
What SnapBridge Can Do for You................................................365
Wireless Connections.......................................................................366
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode)..............................................367
Connecting via Bluetooth...............................................................373
Troubleshooting........................................................................386
xv
xvi
Connecting to Other Devices
Connecting to Computers Via USB ....................................... 387
Installing ViewNX-i............................................................................ 388
Copying Pictures to the Computer............................................. 389
Connecting to Printers ............................................................ 392
Printing Pictures One at a Time.................................................... 393
Printing Multiple Pictures............................................................... 394
Connecting to HDMI Devices ................................................. 395
Connecting to Other HDMI Devices ........................................... 396
On-Camera Flash Photography
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”.............................................. 397
Camera-Mounted Flash Units....................................................... 397
Remote Flash Photography........................................................... 397
Using an On-Camera Flash ..................................................... 398
Flash Control Mode.................................................................. 400
Remote Flash Photography
About Remote Flash Photography ....................................... 401
Controlling Remote Flash Units............................................. 402
Using the SB-500 ............................................................................... 402
Troubleshooting
Before Contacting Customer Support.................................. 405
Problems and Solutions .......................................................... 406
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)................................. 411
Indicators and Error Messages............................................... 412
Technical Notes
Compatible Lenses....................................................................416
The Camera Display ..................................................................417
The Monitor: Photo Mode ..............................................................417
The Monitor: Movie Mode ..............................................................422
The Viewfinder: Photo Mode.........................................................423
The Viewfinder: Movie Mode.........................................................425
The Nikon Creative Lighting System .....................................426
Other Accessories......................................................................431
Charging AC Adapters .....................................................................433
Software......................................................................................436
Caring for the Camera ..............................................................437
Cleaning the Image Sensor ............................................................438
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions......................440
Specifications.............................................................................445
Approved Memory Cards ........................................................456
Memory Card Capacity.............................................................457
Battery Endurance ....................................................................458
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens
User’s Manual .......................................................................459
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens
User’s Manual .......................................................................469
Lenses That May Block the Built-in Flash and AF-Assist
Illuminator.............................................................................479
Trademarks and Licenses ........................................................481
xvii
xviii
Menu List
The camera offers the following menus. For a more complete description of individual menu items, refer to the “Menu Guide” chapter in the Reference Manual .
PLAYBACK MENU
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
Rating
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
Reset photo shooting menu
Storage folder
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Release mode
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Auto bracketing
Multiple exposure
HDR (high dynamic range)
Interval timer shooting
Time-lapse movie
Silent photography
MOVIE SHOOTING MENU
Reset movie shooting menu
File naming
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Release mode (save frame)
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
Reset custom settings a Autofocus a1 AF-C priority selection a2
Auto-area AF face/eye detection a3 Focus points used a4 AF activation a5 Focus point wrap-around a6 Focus point options a7 Low-light AF a8 a9
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
Manual focus ring in AF mode b Metering/exposure b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl b2
Easy exposure compensation b3 Center-weighted area b4
Fine-tune optimal exposure c Timers/AE lock c1
Shutter-release button
AE-L c2 Self-timer c3 Power off delay xix
xx
CUSTOM SETTING MENU d Shooting/display d1 CL mode shooting speed d2 Max. continuous release d3 Exposure delay mode d4 Shutter type d5
Limit selectable image area d6 File number sequence d7 Apply settings to live view d8 Framing grid display d9 Peaking highlights
View all in continuous d10 mode e Bracketing/flash e1 Flash sync speed e2 Flash shutter speed e3 Exposure comp. for flash e4
Auto c ISO sensitivity control e5 Bracketing order
CUSTOM SETTING MENU f Controls f1 Customize i menu f2
Custom controls
(shooting) f3
Custom controls
(playback) f4 Customize command dials f5 Release button to use dial f6 Reverse indicators g Movie g1 Customize i menu g2 Custom controls g3 AF speed g4 AF tracking sensitivity g5 Highlight display
SETUP MENU
Format memory card
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Language
Time zone and date
Monitor brightness
Viewfinder brightness
Viewfinder color balance
Information display
AF fine-tune
Image Dust Off ref photo
Image comment
Copyright information
Beep options
Touch controls
Self-portrait mode
HDMI
Location data display
Airplane mode
Connect to smart device
Connect to PC
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options
Conformity marking
Energy saving
Slot empty release lock
Reset all settings
Firmware version
RETOUCH MENU
NEF (RAW) processing
Trim
Resize
D-Lighting
Quick retouch
Red-eye correction
Straighten
Distortion control
Perspective control
Image overlay
Trim movie
Side-by-side comparison *
MY MENU
Add items
Remove items
Rank items
Choose tab
* Can only be displayed by pressing i and selecting Retouch when a retouched image or original is displayed.
xxi
xxii
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For
Your Safety” in its entirety before using this product.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use this product will read them.
DANGER : Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon carries a high risk of death or severe injury.
WARNING : Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION : Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could result in injury or property damage.
WARNING
• Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
• Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal parts that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other injury.
• Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
• Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
• Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
• Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the lens.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
• Do not aim the flash or AF-assist illuminator at the operator of a motor vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical attention.
• Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Do not use batteries, chargers, AC adapters, or USB cables not specifically designated for use with this product. When using batteries, chargers, AC adapters, and USB cables designated for use with this product, do not:
- Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place them under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame.
- Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
• Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
CAUTION
• Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s internal parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame.
Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could cause fire.
xxiii
xxiv
• Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
• Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction.
• Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
• Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction.
• Do not look directly at the AF-assist illuminator.
Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse effects on vision.
• Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction.
DANGER (Batteries)
• Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire:
- Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
- Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
- Do not disassemble.
- Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces, hairpins, or other metal objects.
- Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to powerful physical shocks.
- Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with hammers.
• Charge only as indicated.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
WARNING (Batteries)
• Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
• Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.
The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten, chewed, or otherwise damaged by animals.
• Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object should it become wet.
• Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging
EN-EL25 rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into contact with the terminals.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing, immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
xxv
xxvi
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior written permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.
• While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also, do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies and private groups,
ID cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
• Comply with copyright notices
Under copyright law, photographs or recordings of copyrighted works made with the camera cannot be used without the permission of the copyright holder. Exceptions apply to personal use, but note that even personal use may be restricted in the case of photographs or recordings of exhibits or live performances.
xxvii
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including lenses, chargers, batteries, charging AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by
Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
xxviii
D Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
D Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.
: https://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa : https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East : https://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the names and functions of camera controls and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
Parts of the Camera
Refer to this section for the names and locations of camera controls and displays.
Camera Body
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
1
9
13 12 11 10
1
Eyelet for camera strap................ 30
2
Stereo microphone....................... 45
3
Speaker............................................ 49
4
Movie-record button ................... 44
5
Power switch............................38, 40
6
Shutter-release button ................ 40
7 E
button......................................... 98
8 S
button .................................... 96
9
Main command dial........................9
10
Photo/movie selector ............40, 44
11
Mode dial........................................ 71
12 Accessory shoe (for optional flash
unit)..................................... 398, 426
13 Focal plane mark ( E
Getting to Know the Camera 1
The Camera Body (Continued)
1 2 3
4
5
7 6
12
1
AF-assist illuminator ............42, 268
Red-eye reduction lamp... 104, 125
Self-timer lamp ........................... 134
2
Built-in flash...........................29, 103
3
Flash pop-up control ...........29, 103
4 Cover for microphone connector
5 Cover for USB and HDMI connectors
6
Lens mounting mark ....................36
7
Image sensor ............................... 438
8 Connector for external
microphone ............................... 431
9
USB connector ................... 387, 392
10
Charge lamp ................................ 434
11
HDMI connector ......................... 395
12
Body cap.................................36, 431
8
9
10
11
D Do Not Touch the Image Sensor
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the image sensor, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch or otherwise damage the sensor. For information on cleaning the image sensor,
see “Cleaning the Image Sensor” ( 0 438).
2 Getting to Know the Camera
Image sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8
9
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
1
Monitor mode button.....................8
2
Viewfinder eyepiece...................432
3
Viewfinder .........................................7
4
Eye sensor..........................................7
5
Diopter adjustment control ..........7
6 A ( L
) button ..............20, 70, 100
7 J
button ........................................ 21
8
Multi selector ................................. 21
9
Memory card access lamp.... 43, 133
10 G
button........................... 21, 167
11 O
button ......................................... 50
12 K
button ....................................... 48
13 i
button................................. 24, 110
14 DISP
button..................................... 18
15 W
button............ 20, 23, 49, 146
16 X
button .......... 20, 49, 61, 145, 162
17
Monitor .....................................12, 59
D The Monitor
The angle of the monitor can be adjusted as shown.
Getting to Know the Camera 3
The Camera Body (Continued)
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
1
Sub-command dial ................9, 290
2 Fn1
button ..............27, 63, 282, 294
3 Fn2
button ..............27, 51, 282, 294
4
Battery-chamber cover latch ......32
5
Battery-chamber cover ................32
6
Lens mount .....................................36
7
Lens release button ......................37
8 CPU contacts
9
Tripod socket ..................................76
10
Battery latch ...................................32
11
Memory card slot ..........................32
6
7
8
9
D Product Serial Number
The serial number for this product can be found by opening the monitor.
4 Getting to Know the Camera
The Monitor and Viewfinder
At default settings, the following indicators appear in the monitor and viewfinder in photo mode; for a full list of indicators, see “The Camera Display”
(
Monitor
21 23 24
Viewfinder
3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
26
25
24
23
22
21
20 19 18 17 16 15 14
9
10
11
12
13
26
2
19
20 1 22 18 17 12 16 15 14 13
1
Shooting mode ............................. 71
2
Focus point...............................42, 54
3
Release mode ..............................131
4
Focus mode.................................... 51
5
AF-area mode ................................ 54
6
Active D-Lighting........................129
7
Picture Control....................112, 200
8
White balance.............. 63, 116, 194
9
Image size............................124, 190
10
Image quality......................122, 190
11 i
icon.......................................16, 24
12
Exposure indicator ....................... 75
Exposure compensation
display ........................................... 98
13 “k” (appears when memory remains for over 1000
exposures) .................................... 34
14 Number of exposures
remaining ............................ 34, 457
15
ISO sensitivity ................................ 96
16
ISO sensitivity indicator .............. 96
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .... 97
Getting to Know the Camera 5
17
Aperture...........................................73
18
Shutter speed ..........................72, 74
19
Subject tracking.............................58
20
Metering ..................... 127, 208, 258
21
Battery indicator ............................34
22
Shutter type................................. 275
23
“Clock not set” indicator..............39
24
Optical VR indicator .......... 135, 212
25
Touch shooting ....................... 12, 59
26
AF-area brackets............................55
The following items appear in movie mode.
Monitor Viewfinder
1 2 4
1 2
3
4
8
7
6
5
1
Recording indicator ......................44
Recording disabled .......................45
2 Frame size and rate/
image quality.................... 139, 254
3
Time remaining..............................44
4
File name ...................................... 254
6 7 8 5 3
5 Release mode
(still photography) ................... 258
6
Sound level .................................. 141
7
Microphone sensitivity .... 141, 259
8
Frequency response .................. 260
6 Getting to Know the Camera
Camera Controls
This section outlines how to use various camera controls and displays.
The Viewfinder
Placing your eye to the viewfinder activates the eye sensor, switching the display from the monitor to the viewfinder (note that the eye sensor will also respond to other objects, such as your fingers). The viewfinder can be used for menus and playback if desired.
Eye sensor
D The Diopter Adjustment Control
To focus the viewfinder, rotate the diopter adjustment control, being careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye.
A Extended Use
When using the viewfinder for extended periods, you can adjust viewfinder brightness and hue for ease of viewing by selecting Off for
Custom Setting d7 ( Apply settings to live view ).
Getting to Know the Camera 7
The Monitor Mode Button
Press the monitor mode button to cycle between viewfinder and monitor displays.
Press the monitor mode button to cycle through the displays as follows.
Automatic display switch : The display switches from the monitor to the viewfinder when you place your eye to the viewfinder, and from the viewfinder to the monitor when you take your eye away.
Viewfinder only : The viewfinder is used for shooting, menus, and playback; the monitor remains blank.
Monitor only : The monitor is used for shooting, menus, and playback; the viewfinder display will remain blank even if you put your eye to the viewfinder.
8 Getting to Know the Camera
The Mode Dial
Rotate the mode dial to choose from the following modes:
• b Auto : A “point-and-shoot” mode in which the camera
Mode dial sets exposure and hue
• P Programmed auto : The camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure.
• S Shutter-priority auto : You choose the shutter speed; the camera selects the aperture for best results.
• A Aperture-priority auto : You choose the aperture; the camera selects the shutter speed for best results.
• M Manual : You control both shutter speed and aperture.
• EFCT Special effects : Take pictures with added special effects.
• U1/U2 User settings modes : Assign frequently-used settings.
• SCN Scene : Use for subjects of a selected type.
The Command Dials
Use the command dials to adjust shutter speed or aperture or in combination with other buttons to change camera settings.
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Getting to Know the Camera 9
The
S
(ISO Sensitivity) Button
The camera adjusts its sensitivity to light
(ISO sensitivity) in response to the lighting conditions in effect at the time the picture is taken.
❚❚
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted in all modes except b and 4 .
• To adjust ISO sensitivity, hold the S button and rotate the main command dial.
• Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 51200, or select Hi 1 or
Hi 2.
• In modes P , S , A , and M , auto ISO sensitivity control can be turned on or off by holding the S button and rotating the sub-command dial; ISO AUTO is displayed when auto ISO sensitivity control is on and ISO when it is not. In h modes and in q modes other than 4 , auto ISO sensitivity control can be turned on or off by holding the S button and rotating the main command dial.
❚❚
Movie Mode
ISO sensitivity adjustment is available only in mode M .
• When Off is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO control (mode M) , ISO sensitivity will be set to the value selected for ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity (mode M) .
• Auto ISO sensitivity control can be turned on or off by holding the S button and rotating the sub-command dial; ISO AUTO is displayed when auto ISO sensitivity control is on and ISO when it is not.
10 Getting to Know the Camera
The
E
(Exposure Compensation) Button
Exposure compensation alters exposure from the value chosen by the camera. Use it to make pictures brighter or darker.
Exposure compensation: −1 EV
No exposure compensation
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted by holding the E button and rotating either command dial.
• Choose higher values to make the picture brighter, lower values to make it darker.
Exposure compensation: +1 EV
Getting to Know the Camera 11
Touch Controls
The touch-sensitive monitor can be used to adjust camera settings, focus and release the shutter, view photos and movies, enter text, and navigate the menus. Touch controls are not available while the viewfinder is in use.
❚❚
Focusing and Releasing the Shutter
Touch the monitor to focus on the selected point (touch AF). In photo mode, the shutter will be released when you lift your finger from the display
(touch shutter).
Touch AF settings can be adjusted by tapping the W icon (
❚❚
Adjusting Settings
Tap highlighted settings in the display and choose the desired option by tapping icons or sliders. Tap Z or press
J to select the chosen option and return to the previous display.
12 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚
Taking Pictures in Self-Portrait Mode
• Self-portrait mode is selected automatically when the monitor is in the self-portrait position.
• In self-portrait mode, exposure compensation and self-timer settings
Self-timer can be adjusted using touch controls.
• Tap the self-timer icon to choose the shutter-release delay and the number of pictures taken.
• Tap the exposure compensation icon to adjust exposure.
• Press the shutter-release button
Exposure compensation halfway to focus. Press it the rest of the way down to take photographs.
• You can also focus and take photographs using touch controls.
• In movie mode, movies can be recorded using the movierecord button.
• To exit self-portrait mode, rotate the monitor out of the selfportrait position.
Getting to Know the Camera 13
D Self-Portrait Mode
Note the following:
• Selecting self-portrait mode disables all controls except the power switch, shutter-release button, movie-record button, photo/movie selector, mode dial, and flash pop-up control.
• If the option selected for Custom Setting c3 ( Power off delay ) >
Standby timer is less than a minute, the timer will expire if no operations are performed for about a minute; otherwise, the timer will expire normally.
• Rotating the monitor to the self-portrait position will not activate self-portrait mode if Disable is selected for Self-portrait mode
(
❚❚
Playback
Flick left or right to view other pictures during full-frame playback.
In full-frame view, touching the bottom of the display brings up a frameadvance bar. Slide your finger left or right over the bar to scroll rapidly to other pictures.
Frame advance bar
14 Getting to Know the Camera
Use stretch and pinch gestures to zoom in and out and slide to scroll. You can also give the display two quick taps to zoom in from full-frame playback or cancel zoom.
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use a pinch gesture in full-frame playback. Use pinch and stretch to choose the number of images displayed from 4, 9, and 72 frames.
❚❚
Movie Playback
Tap the on-screen guide to start movie playback (movies are indicated by a 1 icon). Tap the display to pause or resume, or tap Z to exit to full-frame playback.
Guide
Getting to Know the Camera 15
❚❚
The
i
Menu
Tap the i icon to display the i menu
Tap items to view options.
❚❚
Text Entry
When a keyboard is displayed, you can enter text by tapping the keys (to cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards, tap the keyboard selection button) or move the cursor by tapping in the text display area.
Text display area
Keyboard area
Keyboard selection
16 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚
Navigating the Menus
Slide up or down to scroll.
Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
Tap menu items to display options and tap icons or sliders to change.
To exit without changing settings, tap Z .
D The Touch Screen
The touch screen responds to static electricity and may not respond when covered with third-party protective films, when touched with fingernails or gloved hands, or when touched simultaneously in multiple locations. Do not use excessive force or touch the screen with sharp objects.
A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls option in the setup menu.
Getting to Know the Camera 17
The
DISP
Button
Use the DISP button to view or hide indicators in the monitor or viewfinder.
❚❚
Photo Mode
In photo mode, tapping the DISP button cycles the display as follows:
Indicators on Simplified display Histogram 1
Information display 2
(
Virtual horizon
1 Not displayed during multiple exposure photography or when Off is selected for Custom Setting d7 ( Apply settings to live view ).
2 Not displayed in the viewfinder.
18 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚
Movie Mode
In movie mode, tapping the DISP button cycles the display as follows:
Indicators on Simplified display
Virtual horizon Histogram
Getting to Know the Camera 19
The
X
and
W
Buttons
The X and W buttons are used to zoom the display in the monitor in or out during shooting and playback.
❚❚
Shooting
Tap X to zoom in on the display in the monitor. Tap X to increase the zoom ratio, W to zoom out.
❚❚
Playback
Tap X to zoom in on pictures during full-frame playback. Tap X to increase the zoom ratio, W to zoom out. Tapping W when the picture is displayed full frame “zooms out” to the thumbnail list.
The
A
(
L
) Button
The A ( L ) button can be used during shooting to lock focus and exposure and during playback to protect the current image.
❚❚
Shooting
Press the A ( L ) button to lock focus and exposure.
❚❚
Playback
Protect the current image.
20 Getting to Know the Camera
The
G
Button
Press the G button to view the menus.
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
9
1 D
: Playback menu .................... 178
2 C
: Photo shooting menu........ 184
3 1
: Movie shooting menu......... 253
4 A
: Custom Settings menu....... 261
5 B
: Setup menu............................. 301
6 N
: Retouch menu...................... 323
7 O / m : My Menu or recent settings (defaults to
My Menu).................................... 341
8 d
: Help icon .................................. 23
9
Current settings .......................... 167
❚❚
Using the Menus
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J button.
4 : Cancel and return to previous menu
1 : Move cursor up
J : Select highlighted item
2 : Select highlighted item or display sub-menu
3 : Move cursor down
Getting to Know the Camera 21
1
Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu.
2
Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
3
Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu.
4
Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item (items that are displayed in gray are not currently available and cannot be selected).
22 Getting to Know the Camera
5
Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item.
6
Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option (options that are displayed in gray are not currently available and cannot be selected).
7
Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit without making a selection, press the G button.
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway.
You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (
A The d (Help) Icon
If a d icon appears at the bottom left corner of the display, you can view a description of the currently selected option or menu by tapping the W button. Press 1 or 3 to scroll the text, or tap W again to return to the menus.
Getting to Know the Camera 23
The
i
Button (
i
Icon)
For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button or tap the i icon in the display.
or
Tap the desired item or highlight items and press J to view options. You can also adjust settings by highlighting items and rotating the command dials.
The items displayed in photo mode differ from those displayed in movie mode.
A The Playback i Menu
Pressing the i button during playback displays a context-sensitive menu of frequently-used playback options.
24 Getting to Know the Camera
❚❚
Customizing the
i
Menu
The items displayed in the photo-mode i menu can be chosen using Custom Setting f1 ( Customize i menu ).
1
Select Custom Setting f1.
In the Custom Settings menu, highlight Custom Setting f1
( Customize i menu ) and press J
(for information on using the menus, see “The G Button”,
2
Choose a position.
Highlight a position in the menu you want to edit and press J .
3
Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J to assign it to the selected position and return to the menu displayed in Step
2. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as desired.
4
Exit.
Press the G button to save changes and exit.
Getting to Know the Camera 25
A Options That Can Be Assigned to the i Menu
The following options can be assigned to the i menu for photo mode:
• Choose image area
• Image quality
• Image size
• Exposure compensation
• ISO sensitivity settings
• White balance
• Set Picture Control
• Color space
• Active D-Lighting
• Long exposure NR
• High ISO NR
• Metering
•
•
• Focus mode
• AF-area mode
•
•
•
• HDR (high dynamic
•
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Optical VR
Auto bracketing
Multiple exposure range)
Silent photography
• Release mode
• Custom controls
(shooting)
•
•
•
Exposure delay mode
• Shutter type
• Apply settings to live view
Peaking highlights
Monitor/viewfinder brightness
• Bluetooth connection
• Wi-Fi connection
• Wireless remote connection
The movie-mode i menu can be customized using Custom Setting g1
( Customize i menu ); the options available differ from those for photo mode.
26 Getting to Know the Camera
The Function Buttons (
Fn1
and
Fn2
)
The Fn1 and Fn2 buttons can also be used for quick access to selected settings during shooting. The settings assigned
Fn1 button to these buttons can be chosen using
Custom Setting f2 ( Custom controls
(shooting) ) and the selected setting adjusted by pressing the button and rotating the command dials. At default
Fn2 button settings, the Fn1 button is used for white balance and the Fn2 button to select focus and AF-area modes.
❚❚
Customizing the Function Buttons
The function performed by the function buttons in photo mode are chosen using Custom Setting f2 ( Custom controls
(shooting) ).
1
Select Custom Setting f2.
In the Custom Settings menu, highlight Custom Setting f2 ( Custom controls (shooting) ) and press J (for information on using the menus, see
“The G
2
Choose a button.
Highlight the option for the desired button and press J . Select Fn1 button to choose the role played by the Fn1 button, Fn2 button to choose the role played by the Fn2 button.
Getting to Know the Camera 27
3
Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J to assign it to the selected button and return to the menu displayed in Step
2. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to choose the role played by the remaining button.
4
Exit.
Press the G button to save changes and exit.
A Roles That Can Be Assigned to the Function Buttons
The following roles can be assigned to the function buttons in photo mode:
• AF-ON
• AF lock only
• AE lock (Hold)
• AE lock (Reset on release)
• AE lock only
• AE/AF lock
• FV lock
• Flash off
• Preview
• Bracketing burst
• + NEF (RAW)
• Framing grid display
• Zoom on/off
• MY MENU
• Access top item in
MY MENU
• Playback
• Choose image area
• Image quality/size
• White balance
• Set Picture Control
• Active D-Lighting
• Metering
• Flash mode/ compensation
• Release mode
• Focus mode/AF-area mode
• Auto bracketing
• Multiple exposure
• HDR (high dynamic range)
• Exposure delay mode
• Peaking highlights
• None
The roles played by the function buttons in movie mode can be chosen using Custom Setting g2 ( Custom controls ); the options available differ from those for photo mode.
28 Getting to Know the Camera
The Flash Pop-Up Control
Slide the flash pop-up control to raise the built-in flash.
• Raise the built-in flash for flash photography. The built-in flash will not fire while lowered.
Getting to Know the Camera 29
First Steps
Complete the steps in this chapter before taking pictures for the first time.
Attach the Camera Strap
A strap is supplied with the camera; additional straps are available separately. Attach the strap securely to the camera eyelets.
30 First Steps
Charge the Battery
The battery can be charged using the supplied battery charger.
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For Your Safety” (
and “Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions” ( 0 440).
The Battery Charger
Insert the battery and plug the charger in. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about 2 hours and 30 minutes.
In some countries or regions, charger may be supplied with adapter connected.
The CHARGE lamp will flash while the battery charges.
Battery charging
(flashing)
Charging complete
(steady)
First Steps 31
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards, confirm that the camera power switch is in the OFF position.
Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.
Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it straight into the slot until it clicks into place.
Front
32 First Steps
D Removing the Battery
To remove the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover. Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand.
D Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the camera off, open the battery-chamber cover, and press the card in to eject it ( q ). The card can then be removed by hand ( w ).
First Steps 33
Battery Level
The battery level is shown in the shooting display while the camera is on.
Monitor Viewfinder
The battery level display changes as the battery level diminishes, from L through K and finally to H . When the battery level falls to H , suspend shooting and charge the battery or ready a spare battery. When the battery is exhausted, the H icon will flash; charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery.
Number of Exposures Remaining
When the camera is on, the shooting display show the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings (values over
1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred; e.g., values between 1400 and 1499 are shown as 1.4 k).
Monitor Viewfinder
34 First Steps
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove the battery during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other device. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
D No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, a “no memory card” indicator and [–E–] will appear in the shooting display.
A The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to prevent accidental loss of data.
When this switch is in the “lock” position, the memory card cannot be formatted and photos cannot
Write-protect switch be deleted or recorded (a warning will be displayed in the monitor if you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to the “write” position.
First Steps 35
Attach a Lens
The camera can be used with Z mount lenses. Before attaching or removing lenses, confirm that the camera power switch is in the OFF position. Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens or body cap is removed, and be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures. The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is a NIKKOR Z DX 16–
50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR.
Remove the camera body cap
Remove the rear lens cap
Mounting mark (camera)
Align the mounting marks
G
Do not touch the image sensor or lens contacts.
Mounting mark (lens)
36 First Steps
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place
D F Mount Lenses
Be sure to attach the FTZ mount adapter (available separately) before using F mount lenses. Attempting to attach F mount lenses directly to the camera could damage the lens or image sensor.
D Detaching Lenses
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button ( q ) while turning the lens clockwise ( w ). After removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body cap.
First Steps 37
Turn the Camera On
When you first turn the camera on, you will be prompted to choose a language using the multi selector and J button.
Press G and use the multi selector and
J button to set the camera clock. No other operations can be performed until the clock is set.
q w e
Select time zone r
Select date format
Select daylight saving time option
Set time and date (note that camera uses a 24-hour clock)
38 First Steps
D The t (“Clock Not Set”) Icon
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed. Two days of charging will power the clock for about a month.
If a t icon flashes in the display, the clock has been reset and the date and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct. Use the
Time zone and date > Date and time option in the setup menu to set
the clock to the correct time and date ( 0 303).
A SnapBridge
Use the SnapBridge app to synchronize the camera clock with the clock on a smartphone or tablet (smart device). See SnapBridge online help for details.
First Steps 39
Basic Photography and Playback
This chapter explains the basics of taking and viewing photos.
Taking Photographs (
b
Mode)
Follow the steps below to take photographs in b (auto) mode, an automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
The monitor will light.
2
Select photo mode.
Rotate the photo/movie selector to C .
D Lenses with Retractable Barrels
Lenses with retractable barrels must be extended before use. Rotate the lens zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into the extended position.
40 Basic Photography and Playback
3
Select b mode.
Rotate the mode dial to b .
Mode dial
4
Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left. Bring your elbows in against the sides of your chest.
Framing photos in the viewfinder
Landscape (wide) orientation
Framing photos in the monitor
Portrait (tall) orientation
Landscape (wide) orientation Portrait (tall) orientation
Basic Photography and Playback 41
5
Frame the photograph.
Frame the shot with your subject in the AF-area brackets.
AF-area brackets
6
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
• If the subject is stationary, the focus point will be displayed in green when the camera focuses. If the camera is unable to focus, the AFarea brackets will flash. If the subject is in motion, the camera will continue to adjust focus in response to changes in the distance to the subject while the shutter-release
Focus point button is pressed halfway; focus will not lock.
• The AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus operation if the subject is poorly lit.
D The AF-Assist Illuminator
Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
42 Basic Photography and Playback
7
Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph (you can also take a photograph by touching the monitor: touch your subject to focus and lift your finger to release the shutter). The memory card access lamp will light while the photo is recorded to the memory card. Do not eject the memory card or remove the battery until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete.
Memory card access lamp
D The Standby Timer
If no operations are performed for about
30 seconds, the display will dim before the monitor and viewfinder turn off to reduce the drain on the battery. Press the shutterrelease button halfway to reactivate the display. The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c3 ( Power off delay ) > Standby timer .
Basic Photography and Playback 43
Shooting Movies (
b
Mode)
b (auto) mode can also be used for simple, “point-and-shoot” movie recording.
1
Turn the camera on.
The monitor will light.
2
Select movie mode.
Rotate the photo/movie selector to 1 . Note that the built-in flash and optional flash units cannot be used when the camera is in movie mode.
3
Select b mode.
Rotate the mode dial to b .
Mode dial
44 Basic Photography and Playback
4
Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start recording. While recording is in progress, the camera will display a recording indicator and the time remaining. The camera can be refocused at any time during recording by tapping your subject in the display. Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone; do not cover the microphone during recording.
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
5
End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to end recording. The memory card access lamp will light while the camera finishes saving the movie to the memory card. Do not eject the memory card or remove the battery until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete.
Memory card access lamp
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon indicates that movies cannot be recorded.
Basic Photography and Playback 45
In movie mode, photos can be taken without interrupting recording by pressing the shutter-release button all the way down. The release mode (singleframe or continuous) can be selected before shooting begins using the
Release mode (save frame) option in the movie shooting menu
(note that regardless of the option chosen, only one photo can be taken with each press while movie recording is in progress). A
C icon will flash in the display when a photo is taken.
D Taking Photos in Movie Mode
Note that photo-mode settings do not apply to photos taken in movie mode and that photos can be taken even when the subject is not in focus. Photos are recorded in fine-quality JPEG format at the dimensions currently selected for movie frame size. When Continuous is selected for Release mode (save frame) in the movie shooting menu, the frame advance rate while recording is paused varies with the option selected for Frame size/frame rate . Up to 40 photographs can be taken with each movie.
46 Basic Photography and Playback
D During Shooting
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the display and in photos and movies shot under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or with subjects that are in motion, particularly if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed through the frame. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré , and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source, while noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on the view through the lens. Flicker may occur when power aperture is used during movie recording.
Avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
D Recording Movies
Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached or if the lens is removed, another mode is selected, or the photo/movie selector is rotated to C . Note that the built-in microphone may record sounds made by the camera or lens during optical vibration reduction, autofocus, or changes to aperture.
Basic Photography and Playback 47
Basic Playback
Photographs and movies can be viewed on the camera.
1
Press the K button.
A picture will appear in the display.
2
View additional pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. When pictures are displayed in the monitor, you can view other pictures by flicking a finger left or right over the display. To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutterrelease button halfway.
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon. Tap the on-screen guide or press J to start playback; your current position is shown on the movie progress bar.
1 icon Length Current position/total length
Guide
48 Basic Photography and Playback
Movie progress bar
Volume Guide
The following operations can be performed:
Operation
Pause
Play
Rewind/advance
Start slow-motion playback
Skip 10 s
Description
Press 3 to pause playback.
Press J to resume playback when playback is paused or during rewind/advance.
Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance. Speed increases with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep the control pressed to skip to the beginning or end of the movie (the first frame is indicated by a h in the top right corner of the display, the last frame by a i ). If playback is paused, the movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time; keep the control pressed for continuous rewind or advance.
Press 3 while the movie is paused to start slowmotion playback.
Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or back 10 s.
Skip to last or first frame
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to the last or first frame.
Adjust volume Tap X to increase volume, W to decrease.
Trim movie
Exit
To view movie editing options, pause playback and press the i button.
Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Return to shooting mode
Press the shutter-release button halfway to end playback.
Basic Photography and Playback 49
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Press the O button to delete the current picture. Note that pictures cannot be recovered once deleted.
1
Display a picture you wish to delete.
Display a photo or movie you wish to delete as described in “Basic
Playback” (
2
Delete the picture.
Press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press the O button again to delete the picture and return to playback. To exit without deleting the picture, press
K .
A Delete
To delete selected pictures, all pictures taken on selected dates, or all pictures in a chosen location on the memory card, use the Delete option in the playback menu.
50 Basic Photography and Playback
Basic Settings
This chapter covers basic shooting and playback settings.
Focus
Focus can be adjusted automatically, manually, or using touch controls. How the camera focuses is governed by your choice of focus mode and AF-area mode.
Choosing a Focus Mode
The focus mode controls how the camera focuses. The focus mode can be selected using the Focus mode items in the i menu and the photo and movie shooting menus (
At default settings, the focus mode can also be selected by holding the Fn2 button and rotating the main
Option
AF-A
AF mode autoswitch
Description
• The camera uses AF-S for stationary subjects, AF-C for subjects that are in motion.
• AF mode auto-switch is available only in photo mode.
Basic Settings 51
AF-S
Option
Single AF
AF-C Continuous
AF
AF-F
MF
Full-time
AF
Manual focus
Description
For stationary subjects. Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will turn from red to green; focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash red and the shutter release will be disabled.
For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will predict the final distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, the shutter can only be released if the subject is in focus (focus priority), but this can be changed to allow the shutter to be released at any time (release priority) using
Custom Setting a1 ( AF-C priority selection ).
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the focus point will turn from red to green and focus will lock. This option is only available in movie mode.
Focus manually (
0 61). The shutter can be released
whether or not the subject is in focus.
52 Basic Settings
D Autofocus
The display may brighten or darken while the camera focuses and the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be unable to focus using autofocus in the following situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
D Turning the Camera Off
The focus position may change if you turn the camera off and then on again after focusing.
Basic Settings 53
AF-Area Mode
The focus point can be positioned using the multi selector. AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus. The default setting is Auto-area AF , but other options can be selected using the AFarea mode items in the i menu and the photo and movie shooting menus (
At default settings, AF-area mode can also be selected by holding the Fn2 button and rotating the sub-command dial
3
Option
Pinpoint AF d Single-point AF
Description
Recommended for shots involving static subjects, such as buildings, in-studio product photography, or close-ups. Pinpoint AF is used for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame.
This option is only available when photo mode is selected and Single AF is chosen for Focus mode . Focusing may be slower than with singlepoint AF.
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. Use with stationary subjects.
54 Basic Settings
e Dynamic-area AF f g h
Option
Wide-area AF (S)
Wide-area AF (L)
Auto-area
Description
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points. Use for photographs of athletes and other active subjects that are hard to frame using single-point AF. This option is only available when photo mode is selected and AF mode auto-switch or
Continuous AF is chosen for Focus mode .
As for Single-point AF , except the camera focuses on a wider area, the focus areas for Widearea AF (L) being larger than those for Widearea AF (S) . Use for snapshots or photos of moving subjects that are hard to frame using single-point AF, or in movie mode for smooth focus during panning and tilting shots or when filming moving subjects. If the selected focus area contains subjects at different distances from the camera, the camera will assign priority to the closest subject.
The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. Use on occasions when you don’t have time to select the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for snapshots and other spur-ofthe-moment photos. The camera gives priority to portrait subjects; if a portrait subject is detected, an amber border indicating the focus point will appear around the subject’s face or, if the camera detects the subject’s eyes, one or the other of their eyes (face/eye-detection AF). This frees you to concentrate on composition and your subject’s expression when photographing active portrait
57). Subject tracking ( 0 58) can be
activated by pressing the J button.
Basic Settings 55
A s : The Center Focus Point
In all AF-area modes except Auto-area AF , a dot appears in the focus point when it is in the center of the frame.
A Quick Focus-Point Selection
For quicker focus-point selection, choose Every other point for
Custom Setting a3 ( Focus points used ) to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for Wide-area
AF (L) does not change).
56 Basic Settings
❚❚
Face/Eye-Detection AF
When photographing portrait subjects with Auto-area AF , use Custom Setting a2 ( Auto-area AF face/eye detection ) to choose whether the camera detects both faces and eyes (face/eye-detection
AF) or only faces (face-detection AF). If
Face and eye detection on is selected and a portrait subject is detected, an amber border indicating the focus point will appear around the subject’s face or, if the camera detects the subject’s eyes, one or the other of their eyes (face/eyeFocus point detection AF). Faces detected when Face detection on is selected are similarly indicated by an amber border. If AF-S is selected for focus mode, or if the camera is shooting using AF-S when AF-A is selected for focus mode, the focus point will turn green when the camera focuses.
If more than one portrait subject or more than one eye is detected, e and f icons will appear on the focus point, and you will be able to position the focus point over a different face or eye by pressing 4 or 2 . If the subject looks away after their face is detected, the focus point will move to track their motion.
During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for focus by pressing J .
Basic Settings 57
D Face/Eye-Detection AF
Eye detection is not available in movie mode. Eye and face detection may not perform as expected if:
• the subject’s face occupies a very large or very small proportion of the frame,
• the subject’s face is lit too brightly or too poorly,
• the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses,
• the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or
• the subject moves excessively during shooting.
❚❚
Subject Tracking
When Auto-area AF is selected for AFarea mode , pressing J enables focus tracking. The focus point will change to a targeting reticle; position the reticle over the target and press J again to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, focus will track the subject’s face). To end tracking, press J a third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, tap the W button.
D Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the background.
58 Basic Settings
The Touch Shutter
Touch controls can be used to focus and release the shutter. Touch the display to focus and lift your finger to release the shutter.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to choose the operation performed by tapping the display in shooting mode.
Choose from the following options:
• W : Touch the display to position the focus point and focus (if a face is detected, the camera will focus on the face closest to the selected point). Focus locks while your finger remains on the display; lift your finger to release the shutter. Available only in photo mode.
• V : As above, except that lifting your finger from the display does not release the shutter. If auto-area AF is selected for AFarea mode, the camera will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame; to switch to a different subject, tap it in the display.
• X : Touch shutter disabled.
Basic Settings 59
D Taking Pictures Using Touch Shooting Options
The shutter-release button can be used to focus and take pictures even when the W icon is displayed to show that touch shooting options are active. Touch shooting options can only be used to take pictures one at a time and cannot be used for manual focus or to take photographs during movie recording; for burst photography or to take photos during movie recording, use the shutter-release button.
When eye-detection is enabled, the camera may fail to select the desired eye when the user taps their subject’s face in the monitor, in which case it may be necessary to use the multi selector to choose the desired eye.
In self-timer mode, focus locks on the selected subject when you touch the monitor and the number of shots currently selected in self-timer mode will be taken starting about 10 seconds after you lift your finger from the display.
60 Basic Settings
Manual Focus
Manual focus can be used when autofocus does not produce the desired results. Position the focus point over your subject and rotate the focus or control ring until the subject is in focus.
For greater precision, tap the X button to zoom in on the view through the lens.
When the subject is in focus, the focus point will light green and the in-focus indicator ( I ) will appear in the display
(electronic rangefinding).
Focus distance indicator
In-focus indicator
I
Description
Subject in focus.
F
Focus point is between camera and subject.
H Focus point is behind subject.
F H
Camera unable to determine
(flashes) whether subject is in focus.
In-focus indicator
When using manual focus with subjects not suited to autofocus, note that the in-focus indicator ( I ) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus. Zoom in on the view through the lens and check focus. Use of a tripod is recommended when the camera is having trouble focusing.
Basic Settings 61
D Lenses with Focus-Mode Selection
Manual focus can be selected using the controls on the lens.
D Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your subject and the camera, measure from the focal plane mark ( E ) on the camera body. The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 16 mm (0.63 in.).
16 mm
Focal plane mark
A Focus Peaking
If focus peaking is enabled using Custom
Setting d9 ( Peaking highlights ), objects that are in focus will be indicated by colored outlines in manual focus mode. Note that peaking highlights may not be displayed if the camera is unable to detect outlines, in which case focus can be checked using the view through the lens in the display.
Area in focus
62 Basic Settings
White Balance
White balance ensures that white objects appear white, regardless of the color of the light source. The default setting
( j ) is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose another option as described below.
White balance can be selected using the
White balance items in the i menu and the photo and movie shooting menus
(
At default settings, white balance can also be selected by holding the Fn1 button and rotating the main command dial
(
When 4 ( Auto ), I ( Fluorescent ), K ( Choose color temperature ), or L ( Preset manual ) is selected, you can choose a sub-option by holding the Fn1 button and rotating the sub-command dial.
Basic Settings 63
4
D
H
Option
Auto
Keep white (reduce warm colors)
Keep overall atmosphere
Keep warm lighting colors
Natural light auto
Direct sunlight
K *
3500–
8000
4500–
8000
5200
Description
White balance is adjusted automatically for optimal results with most light sources. When the built-in flash or an optional flash unit is used, white balance will be adjusted according to the lighting produced by the flash.
Eliminate warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting.
Partially preserve warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting.
Preserve warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting.
When used under natural light, this option produces colors closer to those seen by the naked eye.
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
G Cloudy
M Shade
J Incandescent
I Fluorescent
6000 Use in daylight under overcast skies.
8000 Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
3000 Use under incandescent lighting.
Sodium-vapor lamps
Warm-white fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white fluorescent
2700
3000
3700
4200
Day white fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
5000
6500
High temp. mercury-vapor 7200
Use under fluorescent lighting; choose bulb type according to light source.
* Color temperature. All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
64 Basic Settings
5
K
L
Option
Flash
Choose color temperature
Preset manual
K *
5400
2500–
10,000
—
Description
Use with studio strobe lighting and other large flash units.
Choose color temperature from list of values or by holding Fn1 button and rotating sub-command dial.
Measure white balance for subject or light source (press and hold Fn1 button to enter direct measurement mode,
from existing photograph, or choose existing value by holding Fn1 button and rotating sub-command dial.
* Color temperature. All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
A 4 (“Auto”)
The photo info for pictures shot using auto white balance lists the color temperature selected by the camera at the time the picture was taken. You can use this as reference when choosing a value for
Choose color temperature . To view shooting data during playback, go to
Playback display options in the playback menu and select Shooting data for Additional photo info .
Basic Settings 65
D D (“Natural Light Auto”)
D ( Natural light auto ) may not produce the desired results under artificial light. Choose 4 ( Auto ) or an option that matches the light source.
D White Balance Fine-Tuning
At settings other than Choose color temperature , white balance can be fine-tuned using the White balance items in the i menu and the photo and movie shooting menus (
D Studio Flash Lighting
4 ( Auto ) may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to 5 ( Flash ) and use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue.
“Warmer” (redder) colors “Cooler” (bluer) colors
3000 4000 5000 6000 8 000 10000 [ K ]
In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to intentionally make colors colder, higher values if your pictures are tinged blue or to intentionally make colors warmer.
66 Basic Settings
Silent Photography
To enable the electronic shutter and eliminate the noise and vibration caused by operation of the mechanical shutter, select On for Silent photography in the photo shooting menu. Regardless of the setting chosen for Beep options in the setup menu, no beep will sound when the camera focuses or while the self-timer is counting down. Note that the electronic shutter will be used regardless of the option selected for Custom
Setting d4 ( Shutter type ).
An icon is displayed while silent photography is in effect. In release modes other than Continuous H
(extended) , the display will briefly go dark when the shutter is released to signal that a photo has been taken.
Enabling silent photography changes the frame advance rates for continuous release modes and disables some features, including high ISO sensitivity (Hi 1, Hi 2), the flash, long exposure noise reduction, and flicker reduction.
Basic Settings 67
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography mutes the shutter, but this does not absolve photographers of the need to respect their subjects’ privacy and image rights. Although the noise of the mechanical shutter is muted, other sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or aperture adjustment. During silent photography, flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the display and in the final picture under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré , and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.
68 Basic Settings
Rating Pictures
Selected pictures can be rated or marked as candidates for later deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in Capture NX-D and
ViewNX-i. Protected pictures cannot be rated.
1
Select an image.
Press the K button to start playback and display a picture you want to rate.
2
Display the i menu.
Press the i button to view the i menu.
3
Select Rating .
Highlight Rating and press J .
4
Choose a rating.
Use the multi selector to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion. Press J to complete the operation.
Basic Settings 69
Protecting Pictures from Deletion
Use the A ( L ) button to protect pictures from accidental deletion. Note that this does NOT prevent pictures being deleted when the memory card is formatted.
1
Select an image.
Press the K button to start playback and display a picture you want to protect.
2
Press the A ( L ) button.
Protected pictures are indicated by a
P icon; to remove protection, display the picture and press the A ( L ) button again.
A Removing Protection from All Pictures
To remove protection from all pictures in the folder or folders currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu, select Unprotect all in the i menu.
70 Basic Settings
Shooting Controls
This chapter describes controls that can be used during shooting.
The Mode Dial
Rotate the mode dial to choose from the following modes:
• b Auto : A “point-and-shoot” mode in which the camera sets exposure and hue
Mode dial
• P Programmed auto : The camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings.
• S Shutter-priority auto : You choose the shutter speed; the camera selects the aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur motion.
• A Aperture-priority auto : You choose the aperture; the camera selects the shutter speed for best results. Use to blur backgrounds or bring both foreground and background into focus.
• M Manual : You control both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed to “bulb” or “time” for long time-exposures.
• EFCT Special effects : Take pictures with added special effects.
• U1/U2 User settings modes : Assign frequently-used settings to these positions for quick recall.
• SCN Scene : Use for subjects of a selected type.
Shooting Controls 71
P
: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations. Different combinations of shutter speed and aperture that produce the same exposure can be selected by rotating the main command dial (“flexible program”). While flexible program is in effect, a flexible program indicator ( U ) is displayed. To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
S
: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. To choose a shutter speed, rotate the main command dial. Shutter speed can be set to values between 30 s and 1 /
4000 s.
72 Shooting Controls
A
: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. To choose an aperture between the minimum and maximum values for the lens, rotate the sub-command dial.
A Movie Mode Exposure Settings
The following exposure settings can be adjusted in movie mode:
Aperture Shutter speed ISO sensitivity
P ,
A
S
M
1 —
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
— 2
✔
3
1 Exposure for mode S is equivalent to mode P .
2 The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the ISO sensitivity
2 settings > Maximum sensitivity option in the movie shooting menu.
3 If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO control (mode
M) in the movie shooting menu, the upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the
Maximum sensitivity option.
Shooting Controls 73
M
: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to values between 30 s and 1 /
4000
s, or the shutter can be held open
Shutter speed
Aperture indefinitely for a long time-exposure
( 0 76). Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to check exposure.
74 Shooting Controls
D Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators show whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b1 ( EV steps for exposure cntrl ), the amount of under- or overexposure is shown in increments of 1 /
3
or
1 /
2
EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.
Custom Setting b1 set to “1/3 step”
Optimal exposure
Underexposed by 1 /
3
EV
Overexposed by over 3 EV
Monitor
Viewfinder
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control (Mode M)
If auto ISO sensitivity control (
0 97) is enabled, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the selected shutter speed and aperture.
Shooting Controls 75
❚❚
Long Time-Exposures
Select the following shutter speeds for long time-exposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.
• Bulb : The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is held down (note that this option functions in the same way as “time” when the camera is used with an optional ML-L7 remote control).
• Shutter speed : Bulb
(35-second exposure)
• Aperture : f/25
• Time : The exposure starts when the shutter-release button is pressed and ends when the button is pressed a second time.
To prevent blur, mount the camera on a tripod. Nikon also recommends using a fully-charged battery to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in long exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing On for Long exposure NR in the photo shooting menu.
1
Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.
2
Select mode M .
Rotate the mode dial to M .
76 Shooting Controls
3
Choose a shutter speed.
Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of
Bulb or Time .
Bulb Time
4
Open the shutter.
Bulb : After focusing, press the shutter-release button all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until the exposure is complete.
Time : After focusing, press the shutter-release button all the way down.
5
Close the shutter.
Bulb : Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
Time : Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Shooting Controls 77
User Settings:
U1
and
U2
Modes
Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial.
❚❚
Saving User Settings
Follow the steps below to save settings:
1
Adjust settings.
Make the desired adjustments to camera settings, including:
• photo shooting menu options,
• movie shooting menu options,
• Custom Settings, and
• shooting mode, shutter speed (modes S and M ), aperture
(modes A and M ), flexible program (mode P ), exposure compensation, and auto bracketing.
2
Select Save user settings .
Highlight Save user settings in the setup menu and press 2 .
3
Select a position.
Highlight Save to U1 or Save to U2 and press 2 .
4
Save user settings.
Highlight Save settings and press J to assign the settings selected in Step 1 to the mode dial position selected in Step 3.
78 Shooting Controls
❚❚
Recalling User Settings
Rotating the mode dial to U1 or U2 recalls the settings last saved to that position.
❚❚
Resetting User Settings
To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values:
1
Select Reset user settings .
Highlight Reset user settings in the setup menu and press 2 .
2
Select a position.
Highlight Reset U1 or Reset U2 and press 2 .
3
Reset user settings.
Highlight Reset and press J to restore default settings for the selected position. The camera will function in mode P .
D User Settings
The following cannot be saved to U1 or U2 .
Photo shooting menu :
• Storage folder
• Choose image area
• Manage Picture Control
• Multiple exposure
• Interval timer shooting
• Time-lapse movie
Movie shooting menu :
• Manage Picture Control
Shooting Controls 79
h
(Scene Modes)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described in “Taking
Photographs ( b Mode)” (
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial to h and rotating the main command dial until the desired scene appears in the monitor.
+
Mode dial k Portrait l Landscape p Child m Sports n Close up o Night Portrait r Night Landscape s Party/Indoor
Main command dial Monitor t Beach/Snow d Sunset e Dusk/Dawn f Pet Portrait g Candlelight j Blossom z Autumn Colors
0 Food
80 Shooting Controls
k
Portrait
l
Landscape
Use for portraits with soft, naturallooking skin tones. If the subject is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used, background details will be softened to lend the composition a sense of depth.
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
p
Child
Use for snapshots of children.
Clothing and background details are vividly rendered, while skin tones remain soft and natural.
Shooting Controls 81
m
Sports
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in which the main subject stands out clearly.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
n
Close up
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, and other small objects.
o
Night Portrait
Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the background in portraits taken under low light.
82 Shooting Controls
r
Night Landscape
Reduce noise and unnatural colors when photographing night landscapes, including street lighting and neon signs.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
s
Party/Indoor
Capture the effects of indoor background lighting. Use for parties and other indoor scenes.
t
Beach/Snow
Capture the brightness of sunlit expanses of water, snow, or sand.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
Shooting Controls 83
d
Sunset
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
e
Dusk/Dawn
Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light before dawn or after sunset.
D Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
f
Pet Portrait
Use for portraits of active pets.
D Note
The AF-assist illuminator turns off.
84 Shooting Controls
g
Candlelight
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
j
Blossom
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in bloom, and other landscapes featuring expanses of blossoms.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
z
Autumn Colors
Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in autumn leaves.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
For photographs taken by candlelight.
Shooting Controls 85
0
Food
Use for vivid photographs of food.
D Note
If raised, the built-in flash will fire with every shot.
A Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
86 Shooting Controls
q
(Special Effect Modes)
Special effects can be used when taking photographs and shooting movies.
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial to q and rotating the main command dial until the desired option appears in the monitor.
+
Mode dial Main command dial Monitor
4 Night Vision
V Super Vivid
T Pop
U Photo Illustration
5 Toy Camera Effect
6 Miniature Effect
7 Selective Color
1 Silhouette
2 High Key
3 Low Key
Movie frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, and
1920 × 1080 slow-motion are not available in q mode.
Shooting Controls 87
4
Night Vision
Use under conditions of darkness to record monochrome images at high
ISO sensitivities.
D Note
Manual focus can be used if the camera is unable to focus. The built-in flash turns off; optional flash units will not fire.
V
Super Vivid
Overall saturation and contrast are increased for a more vibrant image.
T
Pop
Overall saturation is increased for a more lively image.
88 Shooting Controls
U
Photo Illustration
Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring for a poster effect. Press J
D Notes
• Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a series of stills.
• Autofocus is not available during movie recording.
5
Toy Camera Effect
Create photos and movies with saturation and peripheral illumination similar to pictures shot with a toy camera. Press J to adjust
Shooting Controls 89
6
Miniature Effect
Create photos that appear to be pictures of dioramas. Works best when shooting from a high vantage point. Press J to adjust settings
(
D Notes
• The built-in flash does not fire.
• The AF-assist illuminator does not light.
• Miniature effect movies play back at high speed.
• Sound is not recorded with movies.
7
Selective Color
All colors other than the selected colors are recorded in black and white. Press J to adjust settings
(
D Note
The built-in flash and optional flash units are disabled.
90 Shooting Controls
1
Silhouette
Silhouette subjects against bright backgrounds.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
2
High Key
Use with bright scenes to create bright images that seem filled with light.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
3
Low Key
Use with dark scenes to create dark, low-key images with prominent highlights.
D Note
The built-in flash turns off.
Shooting Controls 91
A Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
A Special Effect Modes
• NEF (RAW) image quality options cannot be selected in 4 , V , T , U ,
5 , 6 , and 7 modes.
• In U and 6 modes, the shooting display refresh rate will drop.
❚❚
Adjusting
U
(Photo Illustration) Settings
To adjust line thickness, select U in special effects mode and then press J .
• Press 4 to thin outlines or 2 to make them thicker.
• Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied during shooting.
❚❚
Adjusting
5
(Toy Camera Effect) Settings
To adjust settings, select 5 in special effects mode and then press J .
• Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting.
• Vividness : Press 2 for more saturation, 4 for less.
• Vignetting : Press 2 for more vignetting, 4 for less.
• Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied during shooting.
92 Shooting Controls
❚❚
Adjusting
6
(Miniature Effect) Settings
To adjust settings, select 6 in special effects mode and then press J .
1
Position the focus point.
• Use the multi selector to position the focus point in the area that you want to be in focus.
• To check focus, press the shutterrelease button halfway.
2
Choose the orientation and size of the area that will be in focus.
• Press J to view miniature effect options.
• Press 4 or 2 to choose the orientation of the area that will be in focus.
• Press 1 or 3 to choose the width of the area that will be in focus.
3
Save changes.
• Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied during shooting.
A Movies
Miniature effect movies play back at high speed. For example, approximately 15 minutes of footage shot with 1920 × 1080/30p selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu
(
0 254) will play back in about a minute.
Shooting Controls 93
❚❚
Adjusting
7
(Selective Color) Settings
To adjust settings, select 7 in special effects mode and then press J .
1
Select colors.
• Press J to view selective color options.
Selected color
• Frame an object of the desired color in the white square at the center of the display.
• To zoom in on the center of the display for more precise color selection, tap the X button.
Tap the W button to zoom out.
• Press 1 to choose the color of the object in the white square as one that will be recorded in color when photographs are taken; the selected color will appear in the first of the numbered color boxes.
• All colors other than those selected in the color boxes will appear in black and white.
2
Choose the color range.
• Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of similar hues that will be
Color range included in photographs; choose from values between 1 and 7 . The higher the value, the wider the range of colors that will be included; the lower the value, the lower the range of colors that will be included.
94 Shooting Controls
3
Select additional colors.
• To select additional colors, rotate the main command dial to highlight another of the numbered color boxes and repeat Steps 1 and 2.
• Up to 3 colors can be selected.
• To deselect the highlighted color, press O .
• To remove all colors, press and hold O . A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes .
4
Save changes.
• Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied during shooting.
D Note: Selective Color
• The camera may have difficulty detecting some colors. Saturated colors are recommended.
• Higher values for color range may include hues from other colors.
Shooting Controls 95
The
S
(ISO Sensitivity) Button
Hold the S button and rotate the main command dial to adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light according to the amount of light available. The current setting is shown in the shooting display.
Choose from settings of from ISO 100 to
ISO 51200; settings about 1 and 2 EV above 51200 are also available for special situations. h mode and all q modes apart from 4 offer an additional ISO-A
(auto) option.
S button
Main command dial
D ISO Sensitivity
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing faster shutter speeds or smaller apertures, but the more likely the image is to be affected by noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines). Noise is particularly likely at settings of Hi 1 and Hi 2 .
D Hi 1 and Hi 2
Hi 1 and Hi 2 correspond respectively to ISO sensitivities 1 and 2 EV over the highest numerical value. Hi 1 is equivalent to ISO 102400, Hi 2 to ISO 204800.
96 Shooting Controls
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
In modes P , S , A , and M , auto ISO sensitivity control can be enabled or disabled by holding the S button and rotating the sub-command dial. When
Sub-command dial auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled,
ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected with the
S button and main command dial. To prevent ISO sensitivity going too high, you can choose an upper limit of from
ISO 200 to Hi 2 using the ISO sensitivity
S button settings > Maximum sensitivity item in the photo shooting menu.
When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the shooting display will show
ISO AUTO . When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user, the altered value is shown in the display.
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than that chosen for
Maximum sensitivity when auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the value selected by the user will be used instead. When a flash is used, shutter speed will be restricted to values between the speed selected for Custom Setting e1 ( Flash sync speed ) and the speed selected for Custom Setting e2 ( Flash shutter speed ).
Shooting Controls 97
The
E
(Exposure Compensation) Button
In modes other than b , exposure compensation can be used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. Choose from values between –5 EV
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) for photographs, or between −3 and +3 EV for movies. By default, adjustments to exposure compensation are made in increments of 1 /
3
EV. This can be changed to 1 /
2
EV using Custom Setting b1 ( EV steps for exposure cntrl ). In general, positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker.
−1 EV No exposure compensation
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E button and rotate a command dial until the desired value is displayed.
Subcommand dial
+1 EV
E button
Main command dial
98 Shooting Controls
At values other than ±0.0, the camera displays a E icon (movie mode) or a E icon and the exposure indicator (photo mode) after you release the E button. The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed by pressing the E button.
Monitor Viewfinder
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0. Except in h and q modes, exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in h and q modes, exposure compensation will be reset when another mode is selected or the camera is turned off ).
D Mode M
In mode M , exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change. The exposure indicator and the current value for exposure compensation can be displayed by pressing the E button.
D Flash Photography
When the built-in flash or an optional flash unit is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the background. Custom
Setting e3 ( Exposure comp. for flash ) can be used to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the background only.
Shooting Controls 99
The
A
(
L
) Button
Press the A ( L ) button to lock focus and exposure.
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Pressing the A ( L ) button locks exposure at the current setting. AE lock can be used to recompose shots after metering a subject that will not be in the selected focus area in the final composition, and is particularly effective with spot or centerweighted metering.
Focus Lock
Press the A ( L ) button to lock focus on the current subject when AF-C is selected for focus mode. When using focus lock, choose an AF-area mode other than auto-area AF.
100 Shooting Controls
❚❚
Locking Focus and Exposure
Follow the steps below to use focus and exposure lock.
1
Set focus and exposure.
Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure.
2
Lock focus and exposure.
With the shutter-release button pressed halfway, press the A ( L ) button to lock both focus and exposure (an AE-L icon will be displayed).
Shutter-release button
A ( L ) button
Shooting Controls 101
3
Recompose the photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked between shots if you keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway ( AF-S ) or keep the A ( L ) button pressed, allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.
D AF-S
When AF-S is selected for focus mode, or if the camera is shooting using
AF-S when AF-A is selected for focus mode, the focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (focus will also lock while the
A ( L ) button is pressed).
D Using the Shutter-Release Button for Exposure Lock
If On (half press) is selected for Custom Setting c1 ( Shutter-release button AE-L ), exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
102 Shooting Controls
The Built-In Flash
You’ll find that the built-in flash enhances the photographic experience in a variety of situations, including when lighting is poor or when you need to fill in shadows and backlit subjects.
Before using the built-in flash, raise it by sliding the flash pop-up control.
1
Slide the flash pop-up control to raise the built-in flash.
2
Choose a flash mode.
Select Flash mode in the i or photo shooting menu and choose a flash mode.
3
Take a picture after pressing the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
Shooting Controls 103
Flash Modes
Use the Flash mode option in the i or photo shooting menu to choose the effect produced by the flash. The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
Option
I
J
L
K
M
X s
Description
Fill flash (front-curtain sync): The flash fires with every shot.
Available in
P , S , A , M
Red-eye reduction : Use for portraits. The red-eye reduction lamp lights before the flash fires to help reduce “red-eye”.
Slow sync : As for “fill flash”, except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light.
P , S
P , A
, A , M
Slow sync + red-eye : Use for portraits or similar shots taken against a night or evening backdrop. In addition to performing red-eye reduction, the camera uses slow shutter speeds to capture background lighting.
Rear-curtain sync: Normally the flash fires as the shutter opens (front-curtain sync); in rear-curtain sync, the flash fires just before the shutter closes.
Slow sync is automatically enabled in modes P and A .
P
P
,
,
A
S , A , M
Auto : The flash fires automatically as required when lighting is poor or the subject is backlit.
Auto + red-eye reduction : As for “red-eye reduction”, except that the flash fires only as required.
b , k , p , n , s , f ,
V , T , U ,
5 b , k , p , n , s , f ,
V , T , U ,
5
104 Shooting Controls
Option t u s
Description
Auto slow sync : As for “slow sync”, except that the flash fires only as required.
Auto slow sync + red-eye : As for “slow-sync + red-eye”, except that the flash fires only as required.
Available in o o
Flash off : The flash does not fire.
b , P , S , A ,
M , k , p , n , o , s , f , V , T ,
U , 5
D Lowering the Built-In Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place.
D Using the Built-In Flash
• Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
• If the built-in flash is used with continuous low-speed or continuous high-speed selected for release mode, only one picture will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. Selecting continuous high-speed (extended) enables burst photography and disables the built-in flash.
• The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.
Shooting Controls 105
D Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-In Flash
Shutter speed can be set as follows when the built-in-flash unit is used:
Mode Shutter speed b , p , n , s , f , 0 , V , T , U , 5 Set automatically by camera ( 1 /
200 s– 1 /
60 s) k o
Set automatically by camera ( 1
Set automatically by camera ( 1
/
200 s– 1 /
30 s)
/
200 s–2 s)
P, A
S
M
Set automatically by camera ( 1 /
200 s– 1 /
60 s) *
1 /
200 s–30 s
1 /
200 s–30 s, Bulb , Time
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, rear-curtain sync, or slow sync with redeye reduction is selected for flash mode.
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Aperture at ISO equivalent of Approximate range
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 25600 51200 m ft
1.4
2 2.8
4 5.6
8 11 16
2 2.8
4 5.6
8 11 16 22
22
32
32
—
0.7–5.0 2 ft 4 in.–16 ft 5 in.
0.6–3.5
2 ft–11 ft 6 in.
2.8
4 5.6
8 11 16 22 32 — — 0.6–2.5
2 ft–8 ft 3 in.
4 5.6
8 11 16 22 32 — — — 0.6–1.8
2 ft–5 ft 11 in.
5.6
8 11 16 22 32 — — — — 0.6–1.3
2 ft–4 ft 3 in.
8 11 16 22 32 — — — — — 0.6–0.9
2 ft–3 ft
* The flash has a minimum range of about 0.6 m (2 ft).
106 Shooting Controls
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3 EV to
+1 EV, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background. By default, adjustments to exposure compensation are made in increments of 1 /
3
EV. This can be changed to 1 /
2
EV using Custom Setting b1 ( EV steps for exposure cntrl ). Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections. In general, choose positive values to make the main subject brighter, negative values to make it darker.
To choose a value for flash compensation, use the Flash compensation item in the photo shooting menu. At values other than
±0.0, a Y icon will appear in the shooting display.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Shooting Controls 107
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV lock is not available in b , h , and q modes.
To use FV lock:
1
Assign FV lock to a camera control.
Assign FV lock to a control using
Custom Setting f2 ( Custom controls
(shooting) ).
2
Raise the flash.
Slide the flash pop-up control to raise the built-in flash.
3
Focus.
Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
108 Shooting Controls
4
Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready indicator ( c ) appears in the camera display, press the control selected in
Step 1. The flash unit will emit a monitor pre-flash to determine the appropriate flash level. Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock icon ( r ) will appear in the camera display.
5
Recompose the photograph.
Flash output will remain locked at the value metered in Step 4.
6
Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock.
7
Release FV lock.
Press the control selected in Step 1 to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock icon ( r ) is no longer displayed.
A Optional Flash Units
Turn the flash unit on and select TTL for Flash control > Flash control mode (external) (SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) or set the flash control mode to TTL, monitor pre-flash q A , or monitor pre-flash A (other flash units; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details).
Shooting Controls 109
The
i
Menu
Pressing the i button displays the i menu: a menu of frequently-used settings for the current mode.
Using the
i
Menu
Press the i button to display the i menu.
Highlight items using the multi selector and press J to view options, then highlight an option and press J to select it and return to the i menu (to exit to the previous display without changing settings, press the i button).
A The Command Dials
You can also adjust settings for highlighted items by rotating the main command dial to choose an option and then pressing J (suboptions, if available, can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial; in some cases, the same options can be selected using either dial). The current option will also be selected if you highlight another item with the multi selector or press the shutter-release button halfway.
110 The i Menu
The Photo-Mode
i
Menu
At default settings, the following items appear in the i menu for photo mode.
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10 12
1
Set Picture Control......................112
2
White balance..............................116
3
Image quality...............................122
4
Image size.....................................124
5
Flash mode ...................................125
6
Metering .......................................127
7
Wi-Fi connection......................... 128
8
Active D-Lighting ....................... 129
9
Release mode .............................. 131
10
Optical VR ..................................... 135
11
AF-area mode.............................. 136
12
Focus mode.................................. 136
The i Menu 111
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.
n
Q
R
S
Option
Auto
Standard
Neutral
Vivid
Description
The camera automatically adjusts hues and tones based on the Standard Picture Control.
The complexions of portrait subjects will appear softer, and such elements as the foliage and sky in outdoor shots more vivid, than in pictures taken with the Standard Picture Control.
Standard processing for balanced results.
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will later be processed or retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors.
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
o Portrait
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.
p Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
q k k
01–
20
Flat
Creative Picture
Control
Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights to shadows. Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched.
Choose from the following Picture Controls, each a unique combination of hue, tone, saturation, and other settings tuned for a particular effect: Dream , Morning , Pop ,
Sunday , Somber , Dramatic , Silence , Bleached ,
Melancholic , Pure , Denim , Toy , Sepia , Blue ,
Red , Pink , Charcoal , Graphite , Binary , and
Carbon .
112 The i Menu
To view Picture Control settings, highlight a Picture Control and press 3 .
Changes to settings can be previewed in the display (
The current Picture Control is indicated by an icon in the display during shooting.
The i Menu 113
❚❚
Modifying Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the photographer’s creative intent. Highlight Set Picture Control in the i menu and press J to display the
Picture Control list, then highlight a
Picture Control and press 3 to display
Picture Control settings. Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in increments of
0.25 (the options available vary with the Picture Control selected). Default settings can be restored by pressing the O button.
After adjusting settings to your satisfaction, press J to put the changes into effect and return to the i menu.
Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk (“ U ”).
D Previous Settings
The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting.
D “A” (Auto)
Selecting the A (auto) option available for some settings lets the camera adjust the setting automatically. Results vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
A The “ n Auto“ Picture Control
If n Auto is selected for Set Picture
Control, settings can be adjusted in the range A−2 to A+2 .
114 The i Menu
The following settings are available:
Option
Effect level
Quick sharp
Sharpening
Mid-range sharpening
Clarity
Contrast
Brightness
Saturation
Hue
Filter effects
Toning
Description
Mute or heighten the effect of Creative Picture Control.
Quickly adjust levels for balanced Sharpening , Midrange sharpening , and Clarity . You can also make individual adjustments to the following parameters:
• Sharpening : Control the sharpness of details and outlines.
• Mid-range sharpening : Adjust sharpness according to the fineness of the patterns and lines in mid-tones affected by Sharpening and Clarity .
• Clarity : Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of thicker outlines without affecting brightness or dynamic range.
Adjust contrast.
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in highlights or shadows.
Control the vividness of colors.
Adjust hue.
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome pictures.
Choose the tint used in monochrome pictures. Pressing
3 when an option other than B&W (black-and-white) is selected displays saturation options.
Toning
(Creative
Picture
Control)
Adjust the shade of color used for Creative Picture
Controls.
D Filter Effects
Choose from the following:
Mode Setting
Y (yellow) These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone down the brightness
O (orange) of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than
R (red) yellow, red more contrast than orange.
G (green) Green softens skin tones and can be used for portraits.
The i Menu 115
White Balance
Adjust white balance (for more information, see “White Balance”,
Option
4 Auto
Keep white (reduce warm colors)
Keep overall atmosphere
Keep warm lighting colors
D Natural light auto
H Direct sunlight
G Cloudy
M Shade
J Incandescent
Option
I Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
Warm-white fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white fluorescent
Day white fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
High temp. mercury-vapor
5
Flash
K Choose color temperature
L Preset manual
Pressing 3 when Auto or Fluorescent is highlighted displays sub-options for the highlighted item.
The current white balance option is indicated by an icon in the display during shooting.
116 The i Menu
❚❚
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Selecting White balance in the i menu displays a list of white balance options. If an option other than Choose color temperature is highlighted, fine-tuning options can be displayed by pressing 3 .
Any changes to fine-tuning options can be previewed in the display.
Increase green
Increase blue Increase amber
Increase magenta
Tap the arrows in the display or use the multi selector to finetune white balance. Press J to save settings and return to the i menu.
An asterisk (“ U ”) next to the white balance icon in the shooting display indicates that fine-tuning is in effect.
The i Menu 117
❚❚
Choosing a Color Temperature
Selecting White balance in the i menu displays a list of white balance options. When Choose color temperature is highlighted, color temperature options can be viewed by pressing 3 .
Value for
A mber– B lue axis
Value for
G reen– M agenta axis
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the A mber– B lue or G reen–
M agenta axis and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J to save settings and return to the i menu. If a value other than zero is selected for the G reen– M agenta axis, an asterisk (“ U “) will be displayed next to the white balance icon.
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with fluorescent lighting. Choose I ( Fluorescent ) for fluorescent light sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate.
118 The i Menu
❚❚
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall up to six custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Follow the steps below to measure a value for preset manual white balance.
1
Display white balance presets.
Highlight Preset manual in the i menu white balance display and press 3 to display a list of white balance presets.
2
Select a preset.
Highlight the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) and press J to select the highlighted preset and return to the i menu.
D Protected Presets
Presets indicated by a g icon are protected and cannot be changed.
3
Select direct measurement mode.
Highlight White balance in the i menu and press and hold J until the
L icon in the shooting display starts to flash and the white balance target
( r ) appears in the center of the frame.
The i Menu 119
4
Measure white balance.
To measure white balance, tap a white or gray object, or use the multi selector to position the r over a white or gray area of the display and either press J or press the shutterrelease button all the way down (note that the r cannot be repositioned when the built-in flash is enabled or an optional flash unit is attached, in which case you will need to measure white balance with a white or gray object positioned in the center of the frame).
If the camera is unable to measure white balance, a message will be displayed. Try measuring white balance again with a different target.
5
Exit direct measurement mode.
Press the i button to exit direct measurement mode.
120 The i Menu
D Measuring Preset Manual White Balance
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured while HDR or multiple exposure shooting is in progress.
D Direct Measurement Mode
Direct measurement mode will end if no operations are performed in the time selected for Custom Setting c3 ( Power off delay ) > Standby timer .
D Managing Presets
The White balance > Preset manual option in the photo shooting menu can be used to copy white balance from an existing photograph to a selected preset, add comments, or protect presets.
D Preset Manual: Selecting a Preset
To choose a preset, select White balance >
Preset manual in the photo shooting menu, then highlight a preset and press J .
If no value currently exists for the selected preset, white balance will be set to 5200 K, the same as Direct sunlight .
The i Menu 121
Image Quality
Choose a file format for photographs.
NEF (RAW)
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG basic
Option
NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine
NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal
NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic
Description
Record two copies of each photo: an NEF
(RAW) image and a JPEG copy. Only the JPEG copy is displayed during playback, but deleting the JPEG copy also deletes the NEF
(RAW) image. The NEF (RAW) image can only be viewed using a computer.
Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
Record photos in JPEG format. Compression increases and file size decreases as quality progresses from “fine” through “normal” to
“basic”.
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
122 The i Menu
A NEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) image files (extension “*.nef”) contain the raw image data output from the image sensor. Using Nikon’s ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D software, you can adjust and re-adjust settings such as exposure compensation and white balance as often as you please without degrading image quality, making this format ideal for photos that will be processed in multiple different ways. ViewNX-i and
Capture NX-D are available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download
Center.
The process of converting NEF (RAW) images to other formats such as
JPEG is referred to as “NEF (RAW) processing”. You can save NEF (RAW) images in other formats using the ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D computer applications or the NEF (RAW) processing option in the camera retouch menu.
The i Menu 123
Image Size
Choose the size at which photographs are recorded.
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
The physical dimensions of the photos in pixels vary with the option selected for Choose image area in the photo shooting menu.
DX (24 × 16)
1 : 1 (16 × 16)
16 : 9 (24 × 14)
Large
5568 × 3712
3712 × 3712
5568 × 3128
Image size
Medium
4176 × 2784
2784 × 2784
4176 × 2344
Small
2784 × 1856
1856 × 1856
2784 × 1560
124 The i Menu
Flash Mode
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash. The options available depend on the mode selected with the mode dial.
Option
I Fill flash
J Red-eye reduction
L Slow sync
K Slow sync + red-eye
M
Rear-curtain sync
X Auto
Available in
P , S , A , M
P , A
P , S , A , M b , k , p , n , s , f , V , T ,
U , 5 s
Option
Auto + red-eye reduction t Auto slow sync u
Auto slow sync + red-eye
Available in b , k , p , n , s , f , V , T ,
U , 5 o o s Flash off b , P , S , A , M , k , p , n , o , s , f , V , T ,
U , 5
The option currently selected is indicated by an icon in the display during shooting.
The i Menu 125
A Flash Modes Available with Optional Flash Units
The flash modes available when an optional flash unit is attached vary with the mode selected with the mode dial.
Option
I Fill flash
J Red-eye reduction
L Slow sync
K Slow sync + red-eye
M Rear-curtain sync
X Auto s Auto + red-eye reduction t Auto slow sync u Auto slow sync + red-eye s Flash off
Available in b , P , S , A , M , k , l , p , m , n , r , s , t , d , e , f , g , j , z , V , T , U , 5 ,
6 , 1 , 2 , 3 b , P , S , A , M , k , l , p , m , n , r , s , t , d , e , f , g , j , z , V , T , U , 5 ,
6 , 1 , 2 , 3
P , A , o
P , A , o
P , S , A , M
—
—
—
— b , P , S , A , M
126 The i Menu
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options are available:
L
Option
Matrix metering
M Center-weighted metering
N t
Spot metering
Highlightweighted metering
Description
The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance for results close to those seen by the naked eye.
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the frame, the size of which can be chosen using
Custom Setting b3 ( Center-weighted area ). This is the classic meter for portraits and is also recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
The camera meters a
3.5 mm circle (equivalent to approximately 2.5% of the frame) centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if auto-area AF is in effect, the camera will instead meter the center focus point).
Spot metering ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
The option currently selected is indicated by an icon in the display during shooting.
The i Menu 127
Wi-Fi Connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. Enable Wi-Fi to establish wireless connections to computers or between the camera and smartphones or tablets (smart devices) running the SnapBridge app.
The camera displays a Wi-Fi icon when
Wi-Fi is enabled.
To turn Wi-Fi off, highlight Wi-Fi connection in the i menu and press J . If Wi-Fi is currently enabled, a Close Wi-Fi connection prompt will be displayed; press J to end the connection.
128 The i Menu
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for highcontrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with matrix metering.
Off Y Auto
Y
Option
Auto
Description
The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting in response to shooting conditions (in mode M , however,
Y Auto is equivalent to Q Normal ).
Z Extra high
P High
Q Normal
R Low c Off
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed from Z Extra high , P High , Q Normal , and
R Low .
Active D-Lighting off.
The option currently selected is indicated by an icon in the display during shooting.
The i Menu 129
D Active D-Lighting
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photos taken with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 1 and Hi 2), including high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity control.
130 The i Menu
Release Mode
Choose the operation performed when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
U
V
W
Option
Single frame
Continuous L
Continuous H
Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
While the shutter-release button is held down, the camera records 1–4 frames per second. The frame rate can be chosen by rotating the sub-command dial when Continuous L is highlighted in the release-mode menu.
While the shutter-release button is held down, the camera records up to about 5 frames per second.
X Continuous H
(extended)
While the shutter-release button is held down, the camera records up to about 11 frames per second.
The built-in flash and optional flash units cannot be used. Flicker reduction has no effect.
E
Self-timer Take pictures with the self-timer (
Pressing 3 when Continuous L is highlighted displays frame advance rate options.
The current release mode is shown by an icon in the shooting display.
The i Menu 131
D The Shooting Display
In continuous low-speed and continuous high-speed modes, the display is updated in real time even while shooting is in progress.
D Frame Advance Rate
Frame advance rate varies with camera settings. The approximate maximum rates at different settings are given in the table below.
Release mode Image quality
Continuous L
JPEG
NEF (RAW)/
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
Bit depth
—
12
14
Silent photography
Off
User-selected
On
JPEG —
12
12
14
4.5 fps
Continuous H
Continuous H
(extended)
NEF (RAW)/
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
JPEG
NEF (RAW)/
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
14
—
5 fps
11 fps
9 fps
*
4 fps
11 fps
8.5 fps
* 10 fps when Electronic front-curtain shutter is selected for Custom Setting d4
( Shutter type ).
D Continuous H (Extended)
Depending on camera settings, exposure may vary erratically during
each burst. This can be prevented by locking exposure ( 0 101).
132 The i Menu
D The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. The approximate number of images that can be stored in the buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count displays while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the memory card access lamp will light. Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove the battery until the access lamp has gone out.
If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
The i Menu 133
❚❚
The Self-Timer
In self-timer mode, pressing the shutter-release button starts a timer, and a photo is taken when the timer expires.
1
Select Release mode in the i menu, highlight Self-timer , and press 3 .
2
Choose the self-timer release delay and number of shots.
Press J when settings complete.
3
Frame the photograph and focus.
In release-priority focus modes, including AF-S , the timer will not start unless the camera is able to focus.
4
Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the timer. A E icon will appear in the display and the self-timer lamp will start to flash, stopping two seconds before the photograph is taken.
D Taking Multiple Shots
Use Custom Setting c2 ( Self-timer ) to choose the number of shots taken, and the interval between the shots taken, when the self-timer finishes counting down.
134 The i Menu
Optical VR
Choose whether to enable optical vibration reduction. The options available vary with the lens.
C
Option
Normal
(VR enabled)
D
E
Sport
Off
Description
Choose for enhanced optical vibration reduction when photographing static subjects.
Choose when photographing athletes and other subjects that are moving rapidly and unpredictably.
Optical vibration reduction off.
Options other than Off are shown by an icon in the display during shooting.
D Optical VR
Optical VR may be unavailable with some lenses. When using vibration reduction, wait for the image in the display to stabilize before shooting. With some lenses, the image in the display may also jiggle after the shutter is released; this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
Normal or Sport is recommended for panning shots. In Normal and
Sport modes, optical vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, optical vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake).
The i Menu 135
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus. For more information, see “AF-Area Mode” (
Option
3 Pinpoint AF d Single-point AF e Dynamic-area AF
Option f Wide-area AF (S) g Wide-area AF (L) h Auto-area AF
The option currently selected is shown by an icon in the display during shooting.
Focus Mode
The focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (
Option
AF-A AF mode auto-switch
AF-S Single AF
Option
AF-C Continuous AF
MF Manual focus
The option currently selected is shown by an icon in the display during shooting.
136 The i Menu
The Movie-Mode
i
Menu
At default settings, the following items appear in the i menu for movie mode.
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10 12
1
Set Picture Control......................138
2
White balance..............................138
3 Frame size and rate/
image quality .............................139
4
Microphone sensitivity..............141
5
Wind noise reduction ................142
6
Metering .......................................143
7
Wi-Fi connection......................... 143
8
Active D-Lighting ....................... 143
9
Electronic VR................................ 143
10
Optical VR ..................................... 144
11
AF-area mode.............................. 144
12
Focus mode.................................. 144
A “Same as Photo Settings”
If Same as photo settings is selected for
Set Picture Control , White balance ,
Active D-Lighting , or Optical VR in the movie shooting menu, a h icon will appear at the top left corner of the i menu, indicating that the options selected for these settings in photo mode also apply in movie mode and vice versa.
The i Menu 137
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for movie recording. For more
information, see “Set Picture Control” ( 0 112).
White Balance
Adjust white balance for movie recording. For more information,
see “White Balance” ( 0 63, 116).
138 The i Menu
Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality
Select the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. You can also choose from two Movie quality options: High quality
(indicated by frame size/rate icons with “ m ”) and Normal .
Together, these options determine the maximum bit rate, as shown in the following table.
Max. bit rate (Mbps) Max.
High recording quality Normal time Frame size/frame rate 1 r 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD) ; 30p s 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD) ; 25p t 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD) ; 24p w 1920 × 1080; 120p 3 x 1920 × 1080; 100p 3 y / y 1920 × 1080; 60p z / z 1920 × 1080; 50p
1 / 1 1920 × 1080; 30p
2 / 2 1920 × 1080; 25p
3 / 3 1920 × 1080; 24p
144
56
28
— 2
28
14
29 min.
59 s 4
A 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) 3
B 1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) 3
36
— 2 3 min.
C 1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion) 3 29
1 Actual frame rates for values listed as 120p, 60p, 30p, and 24p are respectively 119.88 fps,
59.94 fps, 29.97 fps, and 23.976 fps.
2 Movie quality fixed at High quality .
3 The following cannot be used:
Face detection (auto-area AF selected for AF-area mode)
Flicker reduction
Electronic VR
4 Each movie may be recorded across up to 8 files of up to 4 GB each. The number of files and the length of each file vary with the options selected for Frame size/frame rate and
Movie quality . Movies recorded to memory cards formatted in the camera will however be recorded as a single file regardless of size if the card has a capacity over 32 GB.
The i Menu 139
The option currently selected is shown by an icon in the display.
❚❚
Slow-Motion Movies
To record silent slow-motion movies, select a “slow-motion” option for Frame size/frame rate . Slow-motion movies are recorded at 4 or 5 times the rated speed and play back at the rated speed. Movies shot at 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slowmotion) , for example, are recorded at a frame rate of roughly
120 fps and play back at around 30 fps, meaning that 10 seconds recording produces about 40 seconds of footage.
Approximately 10 s
Recording
Playback
Approximately 40 s
Recording and playback speeds are shown below.
Frame size/frame rate Recording speed Normal
A 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) 120p (119.88 fps) 30p (29.97 fps)
B 1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) 100p (100 fps) 25p (25 fps)
C 1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion) 120p (119.88 fps) 24p (23.976 fps)
140 The i Menu
Microphone Sensitivity
Turn the built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose b A to adjust sensitivity automatically or Microphone off to turn sound recording off or adjust microphone sensitivity manually by choosing a value between b 1 and b 20 (the higher the value, the higher the sensitivity).
At settings other than b A , the option currently selected is shown by an icon in the display.
If the sound level is displayed in red, the volume is too high. Reduce microphone sensitivity.
D The 2 Icon
Movies recorded with the microphone off are indicated by a 2 icon.
The i Menu 141
Wind Noise Reduction
Choose whether to enable wind-noise reduction during movie recording.
Option
On
Off
Description
Enable the built-in microphone’s low-cut filter, reducing noise produced by wind blowing over the microphone.
Note that other sounds may also be affected.
Disable wind noise reduction.
An icon appears in the shooting display when On is selected for wind-noise reduction.
Selecting On for Wind noise reduction has no effect on optional stereo microphones. Wind-noise reduction for units that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using microphone controls.
142 The i Menu
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure in movie mode. For more information, see “Metering” (
metering is not available.
Wi-Fi Connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information, see “Wi-Fi
Active D-Lighting
Choose an Active D-Lighting option for movie mode. For more information, see “Active D-Lighting” (
Same as photo settings is selected for Active D-Lighting in the movie shooting menu and Auto is selected in the photo shooting menu, movies will be shot at a setting equivalent to
Normal .
Electronic VR
Select On to enable electronic vibration reduction in movie mode. Electronic vibration reduction is not available in q mode or at frame sizes of 1920 × 1080; 120p , 1920 × 1080;
100p , or 1920 × 1080 (slow-motion). Note that when electronic vibration reduction is on, the angle of view will be reduced, slightly increasing the apparent focal length.
An icon appears in the display while On is selected.
The i Menu 143
Optical VR
Choose an optical vibration reduction option for movie mode.
For more information, see “Optical VR” (
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point when autofocus is enabled in movie mode. For more information, see “AF-Area
Option d Single-point AF f Wide-area AF (S)
Option g Wide-area AF (L) h Auto-area AF
Focus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses in movie mode. For more information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (
Option
AF-S Single AF
AF-C Continuous AF
Option
AF-F Full-time AF
MF Manual focus
144 The i Menu
More About Playback
Learn more about viewing pictures and image information, the playback i menu, playback zoom, and deleting pictures.
Viewing Pictures
Use the X and W buttons to cycle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
W W W
Full-frame playback
X X
Thumbnail playback
X
Full-Frame Playback
Press the K button to view the most recent picture full frame in the display.
Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing 4 or 2 ; to view additional information on the current photograph, press 1 or 3 or tap the DISP button
(
More About Playback 145
Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple images, tap the W button when a picture is displayed full frame. The number of images displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each time you tap the W button and decreases each time you tap the X button. Use the multi selector to highlight images.
D Touch Controls
Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor
D Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation, select On for Rotate tall in the playback menu.
D Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu, photographs are automatically displayed after shooting (because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not rotated automatically during image review). If On (monitor only) is selected, photos will not be displayed in the viewfinder. In continuous release modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in the current series displayed.
146 More About Playback
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 or tap the DISP button to cycle through photo information as shown below.
File information None (image only) 1 Overview data 1
Exposure data 1
Location data 2
Highlights 1 RGB histogram 1 Shooting data 1
1 Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for Playback display options in the playback menu.
2 Displayed only if embedded in the picture ( 0 313).
More About Playback 147
File Information
13
12
11
1 2 3 4
10 9 8 7
5
6
1
Protect status .................................70
2
Retouch indicator....................... 323
3
Upload marking.......................... 157
4 Focus point *
....................................54
5 Frame number/ total number of frames
6
Image quality .............................. 122
7
Image size .................................... 124
8
Image area ................................... 189
9
Time of recording ....................... 303
10
Date of recording ....................... 303
11
Rating...............................................69
12
Folder name................................. 179
13
File name ............................. 189, 254
* Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options .
Exposure Data
1 2 3 4 5
1
Shooting mode..............................71
2
Shutter speed.......................... 72, 74
3
Aperture ..........................................73
4
Exposure compensation..............98
5 ISO sensitivity *
...............................96
* Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode
P , S , A , or M with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
148 More About Playback
Highlights
1 2 1 Highlights (areas that may be overexposed)
2 Folder number-frame
number ........................................ 185
RGB Histogram
1
2
5
6
3
4
1 Folder number-frame
number ........................................ 185
2
White balance....................... 63, 116
Color temperature ............... 118
Preset manual ....................... 119
White balance fine-tuning
............................................... 117
3
Histogram (RGB channel) ......... 150
4
Histogram (red channel)........... 150
5
Histogram (green channel) ...... 150
6
Histogram (blue channel)......... 150
More About Playback 149
D Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed, tap X . Use the X and
W buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the display.
D Histograms
Histograms show tone distribution, with pixel brightness (tone) plotted on the horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical axis. Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:
If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the left.
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see pictures in the display.
150 More About Playback
Shooting Data
Depending on settings at the time the picture was taken, there may be up to five pages of shooting data: general, flash info,
Picture Control, advanced, and copyright information.
❚❚
Shooting Data, Page 1 (General)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13
1
Metering ....................................... 127
Shutter type ................................. 275
Shutter speed .........................72, 74
Aperture.......................................... 73
2
Shooting mode ............................. 71
ISO sensitivity 1
.............................. 96
3
Exposure compensation ............. 98
Optimal exposure tuning 2
4 Focal length
5 Lens data
6
Focus mode.................................... 51
AF-area mode................................ 54
7
Optical VR ..................................... 135
8 White balance 3
9
White balance fine-tuning ....... 117
10
Color space................................... 205
11 Camera name
12
Image area ................................... 189
13 Folder number–frame
number ........................................ 185
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P , S , A , or M with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b4 ( Fine-tune optimal exposure ) has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Also includes color temperature of photos taken using auto white balance.
More About Playback 151
❚❚
Shooting Data, Page 2 (Flash Info)
14
15
16
17
14 Flash type
15
Remote flash control ................. 401
16
Flash mode .................................. 104
17
Flash control mode .................... 209
Flash compensation .................. 212
❚❚
Shooting Data, Page 3 (Picture Control)
18 Picture Control 4
18
4 The items displayed vary with the Picture Control selected when the picture was taken.
19
20
21
22
23
❚❚
Shooting Data, Page 4 (Advanced)
24
19
High ISO noise reduction ......... 206
Long exposure noise
reduction..................................... 206
20
Active D-Lighting ....................... 129
21
HDR exposure differential ........ 230
HDR smoothing .......................... 230
22
Vignette control.......................... 207
23
Retouch history........................... 323
24
Image comment ......................... 310
152 More About Playback
❚❚
Shooting Data, Page 5 (Copyright Information)
5
25
25
Name of photographer ............. 311
26
Copyright holder ........................ 311
26
5 Copyright information is only displayed if recorded with the photograph using the
Copyright information option in the setup menu.
Location Data
The latitude, longitude, and other location data are supplied by
and vary with the smart device ( 0 313). In the case of movies,
the data give the location at the start of recording.
More About Playback 153
Overview Data
1 2 3 4 5
16
6
7
8 29
2 8
17 1 8 19 20 21 22
23
15 9 27 26 25 24
14 13 12 11 10
1 Frame number/ total number of frames
17
Metering....................................... 127
18
Shooting mode..............................71
2
3
Upload marking.......................... 157
Protect status..................................70
19
Shutter speed.......................... 72, 74
20
Aperture ..........................................73
4
Retouch indicator ....................... 323
21 ISO sensitivity 1
...............................96
5
6
Camera name
Image comment indicator ....... 310
22 Focal length
23
Active D-Lighting ....................... 129
7
8
Location data indicator ............. 313
Histogram..................................... 150
24
Picture Control ................... 112, 200
25
Color space .................................. 205
9
Image quality .............................. 122
10
11
12
Image size..................................... 124
Image area ................................... 189
File name ............................. 189, 254
13
Time of recording ....................... 303
14
Date of recording........................ 303
26
Flash mode .................................. 104
27
White balance .......................63, 116
Color temperature ............... 118
Preset manual ....................... 119
White balance fine-tuning
............................................... 117
15
Folder name................................. 179
16
Rating ...............................................69
28
Flash compensation .................. 212
Commander mode 2
29
Exposure compensation..............98
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P , S , A , or M with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (
154 More About Playback
The
i
Button: Playback
Pressing the i button during playback zoom or full-frame or thumbnail playback displays the i menu for playback mode. Select options using the multi selector and J button and press the i button to exit the menu and return to playback.
The options available in the playback i menu vary with the type of picture.
Photos : Pressing the i button when a photo is selected displays the options listed below.
• Quick crop (displayed only during playback zoom) : Save a copy of the current image cropped to the area visible in the display. This option is not available when histograms are displayed.
• Rating : Rate the current picture (
• Select to send/deselect (smart device/PC) : Select the current picture for upload. The option displayed varies with the type of device connected (
• Retouch : Use the options in the retouch menu (
a retouched copy of the current photograph.
• Choose folder : Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures in the highlighted folder.
• Protect : Add protection to or remove protection from the current picture (
• Unprotect all (not available during playback zoom) : Remove protection from all pictures in the folder currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu.
More About Playback 155
Movies : The options below are available when a movie is selected.
• Rating : Rate the current picture (
• Select to send/deselect (PC) : Select the current picture for upload.
The option displayed varies with the type of device connected
(
• Volume control : Adjust playback volume.
• Trim movie : Trim footage from the current movie and save the edited copy in a new file (
• Choose folder : Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures in the highlighted folder.
• Protect : Add protection to or remove protection from the
• Unprotect all : Remove protection from all pictures in the folder currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu.
Movies (playback paused) : The options below are available when movie playback is paused.
• Choose start/end point : Trim footage from the current movie and save the edited copy in a new file (
• Save current frame : Save a selected frame as a JPEG still (
156 More About Playback
Select to Send/Deselect
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to a smart device or computer. The i menu options used to select pictures for upload vary with the type of device connected:
• Select to send/deselect (smart device) : Displayed when the camera is connected to a smart device via built-in Bluetooth or Wi-Fi using the Connect to smart device item in the setup menu
• Select to send/deselect (PC) : Displayed when the camera is connected to a computer via built-in Wi-Fi using the Connect to PC
item in the setup menu ( 0 316).
1
Select a picture.
Display a picture in full-frame playback or playback zoom or select it in the thumbnail list.
2
Choose Select to send/deselect .
Press the i button to display the i menu, then highlight Select to send/deselect and press J . Pictures selected for upload are indicated by a
W icon; to deselect, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
D Movies
Movies cannot be selected for upload when the camera is connected to a smart device via the SnapBridge app. The maximum file size for movies uploaded by other means is 4 GB.
More About Playback 157
Choose Start/End Point
Follow the steps below to create trimmed copies of movies.
1
Display a movie full frame.
2
Pause the movie on the new opening frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” ( 0 48), pressing
J to start and resume playback and 3 to pause, and pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the main command dial to
Movie progress bar locate the desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause playback when you reach the new opening frame.
3
Select Choose start/end point .
Press the i button to display the i menu, then highlight Choose start/ end point and press J .
158 More About Playback
4
Select Start point .
To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight Start point and press J . The frames before the current frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 9.
Start point
5
Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the main command dial; to skip to the first or last frame, rotate the sub-command dial).
6
Choose the end point.
Press the A ( L ) button to switch from the start point ( w ) to the end point ( x ) selection tool and then select the closing frame as described in Step 5. The frames after the selected frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 9.
End point
A ( L ) button
More About Playback 159
7
Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1 .
8
Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1 ). To abandon the current copy and select a new start point or end point as described above, highlight Cancel and press J ; to save the copy, proceed to Step 9.
9
Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press
J to save the copy to a new file. To replace the original movie file with the edited copy, highlight Overwrite existing file and press J .
D Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
D Removing Opening or Closing Footage
To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to
Step 7 without pressing the A ( L ) button in Step 6. To remove only the closing footage, select End point in Step 4, select the closing frame, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the A ( L ) button in
Step 6.
D “Trim Movie”
Movies can also be edited using the Trim movie option in the retouch menu.
160 More About Playback
Save Current Frame
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1
Pause the movie on the desired frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” ( 0 48), pressing
J to start and resume playback and 3 to pause. Pause the movie at the frame you intend to copy.
2
Choose Save current frame .
Press the i button to display the i menu, then highlight Save current frame and press J to create a JPEG copy of the current frame. The image will be recorded at the dimensions selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu.
D Save Current Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save current frame option cannot be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo information.
More About Playback 161
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To zoom in during full-frame playback, tap X or press J .
Navigation window
On-screen guide
While zoom is in effect, you can:
• Zoom in or out/view other areas of the image : Tap X or use stretch gestures to zoom in to a maximum of approximately 21× for large images, 16× for medium images, and 10× for small images created with DX (24×16) selected for image area. Tap
W or use pinch gestures to zoom out. While the photo is zoomed in, use the multi selector or slide a finger over the screen to view areas not currently visible in the display. Keep the multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of the frame. A navigation window is displayed for a few seconds after the zoom ratio is altered; the area currently visible in the display is indicated by a yellow border. The bar under the navigation window shows the zoom ratio, turning green at
1 : 1.
• Select faces : Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in the navigation window. Rotate the sub-command dial or tap the on-screen guide to view other faces.
162 More About Playback
• View other images : Rotate the main command dial or tap the e or f icons at the bottom of the display to view the same location in other photos at the current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a movie is displayed.
• Return to shooting mode : Press the shutter-release button halfway or press the K button to exit to shooting mode.
• Display the menus : Press G to view the menus.
More About Playback 163
Deleting Pictures
Press the O button to delete the current picture or use the
Delete option in the playback menu to delete multiple selected pictures, all pictures taken on a selected date, or all pictures in the current playback folder (protected pictures cannot be deleted). Exercise caution when deleting pictures, as pictures cannot be recovered once deleted.
During Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1
Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
2
Press the O button again.
To delete the picture, press the O button again. To exit without deleting the picture, press K .
164 More About Playback
The Playback Menu
The Delete item in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.
Option Description
Q Selected Delete selected pictures.
i Select date Delete all pictures taken on selected dates (
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
❚❚
Selected: Deleting Selected Pictures
To delete multiple selected pictures, choose Selected and follow the steps below.
1
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture and tap the W button to select or deselect. Selected pictures are marked by a O icon (to view the highlighted picture full screen, touch and hold the X button). Repeat as desired to select additional pictures.
2
Delete the selected pictures.
Press J . A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J .
More About Playback 165
❚❚
Select Date: Deleting Pictures Taken on Selected Dates
To delete all unprotected pictures taken on selected dates, choose Delete > Select date in the playback menu and follow the steps below.
1
Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to select all pictures taken on the highlighted date. Selected dates are marked with a M icon. Repeat as desired to select additional dates; to deselect a date, highlight it and press 2 .
2
Delete the pictures taken on the selected dates.
Press J . A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J .
166 More About Playback
Menu Guide
Learn more about camera menus.
Defaults
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed below.
Playback Menu Defaults
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Focus point
Exposure info
Highlights
RGB histogram
Shooting data
Overview
None (image only)
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
Image type
Frame interval
Rating
Default
—
All
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
On
Show next
On
Still images and movies
2 s
—
Menu Guide > Defaults 167
Photo Shooting Menu Defaults
Option
Reset photo shooting menu
Storage folder
Rename
Select folder by number
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Maximum sensitivity
Maximum sensitivity with c
Minimum shutter speed
White balance
Fine-tuning
Choose color temperature
Preset manual
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
Default
—
NZ_50
100
DSC
DX (24×16)
JPEG normal
Large
14-bit h , q (excluding 4 ): Auto
P , S , A , M : 100
On
51200
Same as without flash
Auto
Auto > Keep overall atmosphere
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K d-1
Auto
— sRGB
Auto
Off
Normal
Normal
On
On
Off
Matrix metering
168 Menu Guide > Defaults
Option
Flash control
Flash control mode (built-in)/Flash control mode (external)
Wireless flash options
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Release mode
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Auto bracketing
Auto bracketing set
Number of shots
Increment
Multiple exposure *
Multiple exposure mode
Number of shots
Overlay mode
Keep all exposures
Overlay shooting
Select first exposure (NEF)
Default
TTL
Off b , k , p , n , f , V , T , 5 : Auto o : Auto slow sync s : Auto + red-eye reduction
U : Flash off
P , S , A , M : Fill flash
0.0
m , f : Continuous H
Other modes: Single frame
U , 6 : Single AF
Other modes: AF mode auto-switch n , g , 0 : Single-point AF m , f : Dynamic-area AF
P , S , A , M , k , l , p , o , r , s , t , d , e , j , z , 4 , V , T , 5 , 7 , 1 ,
2 , 3 : Auto-area AF
(Varies with lens)
AE bracketing
0F
1.0
Off
2
Average
On
On
—
Menu Guide > Defaults 169
Option
HDR (high dynamic range)
HDR mode
Exposure differential
Smoothing
Save individual images (NEF)
Interval timer shooting
Choose start day/time
Interval
Intervals×shots/interval
Exposure smoothing
Silent photography
Interval priority
Starting storage folder
New folder
Reset file numbering
Time-lapse movie
Interval
Shooting time
Default
Off
Auto
Normal
Off
Now
1 minute
0001×1
Off
Off
Off
U
U
5 s
25 minutes
Exposure smoothing
Silent photography
Frame size/frame rate
Interval priority
On
Off
1920×1080; 60p
Off
Silent photography
* Photo shooting menu reset is not available while shooting is in progress.
Off
170 Menu Guide > Defaults
Movie Shooting Menu Defaults
Option
Reset movie shooting menu
File naming
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
ISO sensitivity settings
Maximum sensitivity
Auto ISO control (mode M)
ISO sensitivity (mode M)
White balance
Fine-tuning
Choose color temperature
Preset manual
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Release mode (save frame)
Focus mode
Default
—
DSC
1920×1080; 60p
Normal
MOV
25600
On
100
Same as photo settings
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K d-1
Same as photo settings
—
Off
Normal
Normal
On
On
Auto
Matrix metering m , f : Continuous
Other modes: Single frame b , P , S , A , M , h : Full-time AF q : Single AF
Menu Guide > Defaults 171
AF-area mode
Option
Optical VR
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
Default n , g , 0 : Single-point AF m , f : Wide-area AF (S)
P , S , A , M , k , l , p , o , r , s , t , d , e , j , z , 4 , V , T , 5 , 7 , 1 ,
2 , 3 : Auto-area AF
Same as photo settings
Off
Auto
Disable
Wide range
Off
Custom Settings Menu Defaults
Option
Reset custom settings a1 AF-C priority selection a2 Auto-area AF face/eye detection a3 Focus points used a4 AF activation a5 Focus point wrap-around a6 Focus point options
Manual focus mode
Dynamic-area AF assist a7 Low-light AF a8 Built-in AF-assist illuminator a9 Manual focus ring in AF mode b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl b2 Easy exposure compensation b3 Center-weighted area
Default
—
Focus
Face and eye detection on
All points
Shutter/AF-ON
No wrap
On
On
On
On
Enable
1/3 step
Off
ø
8 mm
172 Menu Guide > Defaults
Option b4 Fine-tune optimal exposure
Matrix metering
Center-weighted metering
Spot metering
Highlight-weighted metering c1 Shutter-release button AE-L c2 Self-timer
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
Interval between shots c3 Power off delay
Playback
Menus
Image review
Standby timer d1 CL mode shooting speed d2 Max. continuous release d3 Exposure delay mode d4 Shutter type d5 Limit selectable image area
DX (24×16)
1:1 (16×16)
16:9 (24×14) d6 File number sequence d7 Apply settings to live view d8 Framing grid display d9 Peaking highlights
Peaking level
Peaking highlight color d10 View all in continuous mode
Default
0
0
0
0
Off
10 s
1
0.5 s
10 s
1 min
4 s
30 s
3 fps
100
Off
Auto
M (cannot be deselected)
M
M
On
On
Off
Off
Red
On
Menu Guide > Defaults 173
Option e1 Flash sync speed e2 Flash shutter speed e3 Exposure comp. for flash e4 Auto c ISO sensitivity control e5 Bracketing order f1 Customize i menu f2 Custom controls (shooting)
Fn1 button
Fn2 button
AE-L/AF-L button
OK button
Movie record button
Lens Fn button
Lens control ring f3 Custom controls (playback)
AE-L/AF-L button
OK button f4 Customize command dials
Reverse rotation
Change main/sub
Menus and playback
Sub-dial frame advance f5 Release button to use dial f6 Reverse indicators
Default
1/200 s
1/60 s
Entire frame
Subject and background
MTR > under > over
Set Picture Control; White balance;
Image quality; Image size; Flash mode;
Metering; Wi-Fi connection;
Active D-Lighting; Release mode;
Optical VR; AF-area mode; Focus mode
White balance
Focus mode/AF-area mode
AE/AF lock
Select center focus point
None
AE/AF lock
(Varies with lens)
Protect
Zoom on/off
Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U
Exposure setting: Off
Autofocus setting: Off
Off
10 frames
No
174 Menu Guide > Defaults
g1 Customize i
Option
menu g2 Custom controls
Fn1 button
Fn2 button
AE-L/AF-L button
OK button
Lens control ring g3 AF speed
When to apply g4 AF tracking sensitivity g5 Highlight display
Display pattern
Highlight display threshold
Default
Set Picture Control; White balance;
Frame size and rate/Image quality;
Microphone sensitivity; Wind noise reduction; Metering; Wi-Fi connection;
Active D-Lighting; Electronic VR; Optical
VR; AF-area mode; Focus mode
White balance
Focus mode/AF-area mode
AE/AF lock
Select center focus point
(Varies with lens)
0
Always
4
Off
248
Menu Guide > Defaults 175
Setup Menu Defaults
Format memory card
Option
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Language
Time zone and date
Time zone
Date and time
Date format
Daylight saving time
Monitor brightness
Viewfinder brightness
Viewfinder color balance
Information display
AF fine-tune
AF fine-tune (On/Off)
Saved value
Default
List saved values
Image Dust Off ref photo
Image comment
Attach comment
Copyright information
Attach copyright information
Beep options
Beep on/off
Volume
Pitch
176 Menu Guide > Defaults
Default
—
—
—
(Default varies with country of purchase)
(Default varies with country of purchase)
(Default varies with country of purchase)
(Default varies with country of purchase)
Off
0
Auto
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Dark on light
U
U
Off
—
0
—
—
On
2
Low
Option
Touch controls
Enable/disable touch controls
Full-frame playback flicks
Self-portrait mode
HDMI
Output resolution
Output range
Location data display
Airplane mode
Connect to smart device
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Select to send (Bluetooth)
Wi-Fi connection
Send while off
Connect to PC
Wi-Fi connection
Network settings
Options
MAC address
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options
Wireless remote connection
Save wireless remote controller
Delete wireless remote controller
Assign Fn1 button
Assign Fn2 button
Conformity marking
Energy saving
Slot empty release lock
Reset all settings
Firmware version
Default
Enable
Left V Right
Enable
Auto
Auto
—
Disable
—
—
—
On
Disable
—
—
—
Disable
—
—
Same as camera K button
Same as camera G button
—
Enable
Release locked
—
—
Menu Guide > Defaults 177
D
The Playback Menu: Managing Images
To view playback options, select the D tab in the camera menus.
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Image review
0
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
Rating
Option
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Playback Menu Defaults” (
0
178 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
Delete
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Delete multiple images.
Option Description
Q Selected Delete selected pictures.
i Select date Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback.
Playback Folder
G button
➜
D (playback menu)
Choose a folder for playback.
Option
(Folder name)
All
Current
Description
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be visible during playback. Folders can be renamed using the Storage folder > Rename option in the photo
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback.
Playback Display Options
G button
➜
D (playback menu)
Choose the information available in the playback photo information display. Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect; items selected for display during full-frame playback are indicated by L icons. To return to the playback menu, press J .
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 179
Image Review
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
Choose whether pictures are displayed automatically immediately after shooting.
Option
On
On (monitor only)
Off
Description
Pictures appear in the currently-selected display (monitor or viewfinder) as they are taken.
Pictures are displayed after shooting only when the monitor is used to frame shots. Pictures are not displayed in the viewfinder during shooting.
Pictures can only be viewed by pressing the K button.
After Delete
G button
➜
D (playback menu)
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
S
T
U
Option
Show next
Show previous
Continue as before
Description
The following picture is displayed (if there is no following picture—i.e., if the deleted image was the last picture—the preceding picture will be displayed).
The preceding picture is displayed (if there is no preceding picture—i.e., if the deleted image was the first picture—the next picture will be displayed).
If you were scrolling through pictures in the order recorded, the following picture will be displayed as described for Show next . If you were scrolling through pictures in reverse order, the preceding picture will be displayed as described for Show previous .
180 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
Rotate Tall
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be automatically rotated for display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image review.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 181
Slide Show
G button ➜ D (playback menu)
View a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
Option
Start
Image type
Start slide show.
Description
Choose the type of image displayed from Still images and movies , Still images only , and Movies only , or select By rating to view only pictures with selected ratings (highlight ratings and press 2 to select or deselect).
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start and press J . The following operations can be performed while the show is in progress:
• Skip back/skip ahead : Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to the next frame.
• View additional photo info : Press 1 or 3 to change or hide the photo info displayed (still images only).
• Pause : Press J to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight
Restart and press J .
• Adjust volume : Tap X during movie playback to increase the volume, W to decrease.
• Exit to the playback menu : Press G to end the slide show and return to the playback menu.
• Exit to playback mode : Press K to end the slide show and exit to playback mode.
• Exit to shooting mode : Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to shooting mode.
182 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
A dialog is displayed when the show ends. Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu.
Rating
G button
➜ D (playback menu)
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion. Press 4 or
2 to highlight pictures and press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion (to view the highlighted picture full screen, touch and hold the X button).
Press J to exit when the operation is complete.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 183
C
The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To view the photo shooting menu, select the C tab in the camera menus.
Option
Reset photo shooting menu
Storage folder
File naming
Choose image area
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
0
Option
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction shooting
Metering
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Release mode
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Auto bracketing
Multiple exposure
HDR (high dynamic range)
Interval timer shooting
Time-lapse movie
Silent photography
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Photo Shooting Menu Defaults” ( 0 168).
0
184 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Reset Photo Shooting Menu
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select Yes to restore photo shooting menu options to their default values (
Storage Folder
G button
➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Rename folders and select the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored.
Folder
Folder number Folder name
Rename
Folders are identified by a 5-character folder name preceded by a 3-digit folder number assigned automatically by the camera.
The default folder name is “NZ_50”; to change the name assigned to new folders, select Rename . If desired, the default name can be restored by pressing and holding the O button while the keyboard is displayed. Existing folders cannot be renamed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 185
D Text Entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required. Tap letters on the screen or use the multi selector to highlight characters and press J to insert them at the current cursor position (note that if a character is entered when the field is full, the last character in the field will be deleted). To delete the character under the cursor, press the O button.
To move the cursor to a new position, tap the display or rotate the main command dial. To complete entry and return to the previous menu, tap X . To exit without completing text entry, press G .
Text display area
Keyboard area
186 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Select Folder by Number
To select folders by number or create a new folder with the current folder name and a new folder number:
1
Choose Select folder by number .
Highlight Select folder by number and press 2 .
2
Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change. If a folder with the selected number already exists, one of the following icons will be displayed:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 5000 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the main menu (to exit without changing the storage folder, press the
G button). If a folder with the specified number does not already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 187
Select Folder from List
To choose from a list of existing folders:
1
Choose Select folder from list .
Highlight Select folder from list and press 2 .
2
Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3
Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the main menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.
D Folder and File Numbers
Once the folder number has reached 999, no new folders will be created (and the shutter release will consequently be disabled) after the file number reaches 9999 or the number of files in the folder reaches 5000, or if you attempt to record a movie when the camera calculates that the number of files needed for a movie of maximum length would result in the creation of a file numbered higher than 9999 or the folder holding over 5000 files. To continue shooting, create a folder with a number less than 999 or try changing the options selected for Frame size/frame rate and Movie quality .
D Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of files or folders.
188 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
File Naming
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space
(
0 205), “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a three-
letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG” or “_DSC0002.JPG”). The
File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the
“DSC” portion of the file name as described in “Text Entry”
(
D Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.MOV” for MOV movies, “.MP4” for MP4 movies, and
“.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but different extensions.
Choose Image Area
G button
➜
C (photo shooting menu)
The camera offers a choice of the following image areas: a
Option
DX (24×16)
Description
Pictures are recorded using a 23.5 × 15.7 mm image area (DX format).
m 1 : 1 (16×16) Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.
Z 16 : 9 (24×14) Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 189
Image Quality
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see
Image Size
G button
➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the size, in pixels, of photographs recorded with the camera. The dimensions vary with the option selected for image area.
Image area
DX (24×16)
DX format
1 : 1 (16×16)
16 : 9 (24×14)
Option
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Size (pixels)
5568 × 3712
4176 × 2784
2784 × 1856
3712 × 3712
2784 × 2784
1856 × 1856
5568 × 3128
4176 × 2344
2784 × 1560
Print size (cm/in.) *
47.1 × 31.4/18.6 × 12.4
35.4 × 23.6/13.9 × 9.3
23.6 × 15.7/9.3 × 6.2
31.4 × 31.4/12.4 × 12.4
23.6 × 23.6/9.3 × 9.3
15.7 × 15.7/6.2 × 6.2
47.1 × 26.5/18.6 × 10.4
35.4 × 19.8/13.9 × 7.8
23.6 × 13.2/9.3 × 5.2
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in d ots p er i nch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
190 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
NEF (RAW) Recording
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the bit depth at which NEF (RAW) photographs are recorded.
q r
Option
12-bit
14-bit
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
14 bits, producing files larger than those with a bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data recorded.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 191
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs.
Option
ISO sensitivity
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Description
Choose from settings of ISO 100 to 51200, Hi 1, and Hi 2. h and all q modes except 4 also offer an Auto option.
If On is selected, the camera will automatically adjust ISO sensitivity when optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected for ISO sensitivity . The options listed below are available for fine-tuning auto ISO sensitivity control.
• Maximum sensitivity : Choose an upper limit for ISO sensitivity to prevent it being raised too high.
• Maximum sensitivity with c : Choose the upper ISO sensitivity limit for photos taken using an optional flash unit.
• Minimum shutter speed : Choose the shutter speed below which auto ISO sensitivity control will kick in to prevent underexposure in modes P and A . Options range from
1 /
4000 s to 30 s. An Auto option is also available (
192 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
A “Minimum Shutter Speed” > “Auto”
If Auto is selected for Auto ISO sensitivity control > Minimum shutter speed , the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens. For example, the camera will automatically select fast minimum shutter speeds to reduce the blur that commonly occurs with telephoto lenses.
Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned for faster or slower minimum values by highlighting Auto and pressing 2 ; choosing fast minimum shutter speeds when photographing fast-moving objects reduces blur.
Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimum exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for
Maximum sensitivity .
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 193
White Balance
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust white balance. For more information, see the “White Balance”
sections in “Basic Settings” ( 0 63) and
“The i
The White Balance Menu: Fine-Tuning
Fine-tuning is available via the camera menus. For more information on fine-tuning, see “Fine-Tuning White Balance”
( 0 117). For information on fine-tuning preset manual white
balance, see “Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance” ( 0 199).
1
Display fine-tuning options.
Go to White balance in the photo shooting menu, highlight a white balance option, and press 2 .
194 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
2
Fine-tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white balance. White balance can be fine-tuned on the A mber– B lue axis in steps of 0.5 and the G reen– M agenta
Coordinates axis in steps of 0.25. The horizontal
( A mber– B lue) axis corresponds to color temperature, while the vertical
( G reen– M agenta) axis has the similar
Adjustment effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters.
The horizontal axis is ruled in increments equivalent to about
5 mired, the vertical axis in increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J to save settings and return to the photo shooting menu. If white balance has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“ U ”) will appear next to the white balance icon in the shooting display.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 195
D White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J ( Incandescent ) is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
D “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6 , is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
The White Balance Menu: Choosing a Color
Temperature
Color temperature can be selected using the White balance >
Choose color temperature option in the photo shooting menu.
Enter values for the amber–blue and green–magenta axes as described below.
1
Select Choose color temperature .
Go to White balance in the photo shooting menu, highlight
Choose color temperature and press 2 .
196 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
2
Select values for amber–blue and green–magenta.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the A mber– B lue or
G reen– M agenta axis and press 1 or 3 to change.
Value for
A mber– B lue axis
Value for
G reen– M agenta axis
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J to save settings and return to the photo shooting menu. If a value other than zero is selected for the
G reen– M agenta axis, an asterisk (“ U ”) will appear next to the white balance icon in the shooting display.
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with fluorescent lighting. Choose I ( Fluorescent ) for fluorescent light sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 197
Preset Manual: Copying White Balance from a
Photograph
The Preset manual option in the white balance menu can be used to copy a white balance value from an existing photograph.
For more information on preset manual white balance, see
1
Select Preset manual .
Go to White balance in the photo shooting menu, highlight Preset manual , and press 2 .
2
Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-6) and tap X .
3
Choose Select image .
The preset manual white balance menu will be displayed; highlight
Select image and press 2 .
4
Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To view the highlighted image full frame, touch and hold the X button.
198 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
5
Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value from the highlighted photograph to the selected preset. If the highlighted photograph has a comment, the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset.
D Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The current preset can be fine-tuned by selecting Fine-tune in the preset manual white balance menu and adjusting white balance as described in “The White Balance
Menu: Fine-Tuning” (
D Edit Comment
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36 characters for the current white-balance preset, select Edit comment in the preset manual white balance menu.
D Protect
To protect the current white-balance preset, select Protect in the preset manual white balance menu, then highlight On and press
J . Protected presets cannot be modified and the Fine-tune and Edit comment options cannot be used.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 199
Set Picture Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose how new photos will be processed. For more
information, see “Set Picture Control” ( 0 112).
Set Picture Control: Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent.
1
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Picture Control list and press 2 .
2
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25 (the options available vary with the Picture Control selected). To quickly adjust levels for balanced Sharpening , Mid-range sharpening , and Clarity , highlight Quick sharp and press 4 or 2 . Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted.
Default settings can be restored by pressing the O button.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes and return to the Picture Control list.
200 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Custom Picture Controls
Modifications to existing Picture Controls can be saved as custom
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the photo or movie shooting menu. Custom Picture Controls can be copied to a memory card and used in compatible software or shared among cameras of the same model.
D The i Menu
Modifying Picture Controls from the i menu allows the effect to be previewed in the display. Highlight Set Picture Control in the i menu and press J , then press 4 and 2 to choose a Picture Control and press 3 to display Picture Control settings.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 201
Manage Picture Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
Option
Save/edit
Rename
Delete
Load/save
Description
Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom
Picture Controls.
Rename custom Picture Controls.
Delete custom Picture Controls.
Use the following options to copy custom Picture
Controls to and from the memory card. Once copied to the memory card, Picture Controls can be used with other cameras or compatible software.
• Copy to camera : Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through
C-9 on the camera and name them as desired.
• Delete from card : Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the memory card.
• Copy to card : Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through
C-9) from the camera to a selected destination
(1 through 99) on the memory card.
202 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1
Select Save/edit .
Highlight Save/edit and press 2 .
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control and press 2 , or press J to proceed to
Step 4 to save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification.
3
Edit the selected Picture Control.
To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press the
O button. Press J when settings are complete.
4
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2 .
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 203
5
Name the Picture Control.
A text-entry dialog will be displayed. By default, new Picture
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control; to choose a different name, rename the Picture Control as
described in “Text Entry” ( 0 186). Tap the keyboard selection
button to cycle through the upper-case, lower-case, and symbol keyboards. Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be deleted. When entry is complete, tap X to add the new Picture Control to the Picture Control list.
Name area
Keyboard area Keyboard selection
D Custom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
D The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display.
Original
Picture Control icon
204 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Color Space
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. sRGB is recommended for general-purpose printing and display, Adobe RGB , with its broader gamut of colors, for professional publication and commercial printing.
D Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require applications, displays, and printers that support color management.
D Color Space
ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with this camera. Results cannot be guaranteed with third-party software.
Active D-Lighting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with natural contrast. For more information, see “Active
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 205
Long Exposure NR
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be processed to reduce noise (bright spots or fog). The time required for processing roughly doubles; during processing, the message “Performing noise reduction“ will be displayed and pictures cannot be taken (if the camera is turned off before processing is complete, the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be performed).
High ISO NR
G button
➜
C (photo shooting menu)
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise”.
Option
High/
Normal/
Low
Off
Description
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels), particularly in pictures taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High , Normal , and Low .
Noise reduction is performed only as required and never at an amount as high as when Low is selected.
206 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Vignette Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Vignette control reduces the drop in brightness that occurs at the edges of the frame. Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High ,
Normal , Low , and Off .
D Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the display.
Diffraction Compensation
G button
➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high f/-numbers).
Auto Distortion Control
G button
➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On as required to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses (note that On may be selected automatically with some lenses, in which case the Auto distortion control option will be grayed out and unavailable).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 207
Flicker Reduction Shooting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
When On is selected, the camera will time photographs to reduce banding, areas of under- or over-exposure, or (in photographs taken in continuous release modes) uneven coloration caused by the flicker of such light sources as fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps (note that the frame rate may drop while flicker reduction is in effect, and that the frame rate may slow or become erratic during burst shooting).
D “Flicker Reduction Shooting” in the Photo Shooting Menu
Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved with dark backgrounds, bright light sources, or decorative lighting displays and other non-standard lighting. Depending on the light source, there may be a slight delay before the shutter is released. The desired results may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during shooting.
Flicker detection will not take effect when Continuous H (extended) is selected for release mode or silent photography, HDR, or exposure delay mode is enabled.
Metering
G button
➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. For more information, see “Metering” (
208 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Flash Control
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust flash settings for the built-in flash, optional flash units, and wireless flash photography.
• For information on using optional flash units for on-camera flash photography, see “On-Camera Flash Photography”
• For information on using optional flash units for wireless flash photography, see “Remote Flash Photography” (
Flash Control Mode (Built-in)
Choose the flash control mode for the built-in flash.
• TTL : i-TTL mode. Flash level is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.
• Manual : Choose the flash level (Manual output amount) manually.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 209
A Flash Control Mode (External)
When an optional flash is attached and turned on, the Flash control mode (built-in) option is replaced by Flash control mode (external) .
A The Built-In Flash: Metering and Flash Control
The camera uses i-TTL balanced fill-flash flash control with matrix, center-weighted, and highlight-weighted metering, standard i-TTL fillflash flash control with spot metering. In i-TTL modes, flash output is adjusted based on monitor preflashes emitted by the built-in flash when the shutter-release button is pressed.
• i-TTL balanced fill-flash : The built-in flash emits a series of nearly invisible preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before the main flash.
The camera analyzes preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of the frame and adjusts flash output for a natural balance between the main subject and ambient background lighting.
• Standard i-TTL fill-flash : Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the frame to standard level; the brightness of the background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in which the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is used.
210 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Wireless Flash Options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote flash units.
This option is available only when an
SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the camera.
Option
Y Optical AWL
Off
Description
The remote flash units are controlled using lowintensity flashes emitted by the master flash
Remote flash photography disabled.
Group Flash Options
Adjust settings for the flash units in each group when using optional flash units
(
Flash Mode
G button
➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash or optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe. For more
information, see “Flash Modes” ( 0 104).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 211
Flash Compensation
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Adjust flash output for the built-in flash or optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe to control the brightness of the main subject relative to the background
( 0 107). Flash output can be increased to make the main subject
appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
Release Mode
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Choose the operation performed when the shutter is released.
For more information, see “Release Mode” (
Focus Mode
G button
➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more information, see “Choosing a Focus Mode” (
AF-Area Mode
G button
➜
C (photo shooting menu)
Choose how the camera selects the focus-point for autofocus.
For more information, see “AF-Area Mode” (
Optical VR
G button
➜
C (photo shooting menu)
Choose whether to enable optical vibration reduction. For more
information, see “Optical VR” ( 0 135).
212 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Auto Bracketing
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Vary exposure, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject. The following options are available:
• Auto bracketing set : Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect. Choose AE bracketing perform exposure bracketing, WB bracketing to perform white-balance bracketing, or ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D-Lighting.
• Number of shots : Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
• Increment : Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each shot (ADL bracketing excluded).
• Amount : Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot
(ADL bracketing only).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 213
Exposure Bracketing
Vary exposure over a series of photographs.
Exposure modified by:
0 EV
Exposure modified by:
–1 EV
Exposure modified by:
+1 EV
1
Select AE bracketing for Auto bracketing set .
The camera will display Number of shots and Increment options.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press 4 or 2 to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than 0F , a bracketing icon will appear in the display.
214 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3
Choose a bracketing increment.
Highlight Increment and press 4 or
2 to choose the bracketing increment. When 1/3 step is selected for Custom Setting b1 ( EV steps for exposure cntrl ), the size of the increment can be chosen from 0.3 ( 1 /
3
), 0.7 ( 2 /
3
), 1, 2, and 3 EV.
The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 ( 1 /
3
) EV are listed below.
“Number of shots”
0F
+3F
−3F
+2F
−2F
3F
5F
7F
9F
Bracketing indicator No. of shots Bracketing order (EVs)
0 0
3
3
0/+0.3/+0.7
0/–0.7/–0.3
3
5
2
2
0/+0.3
0/–0.3
0/–0.3/+0.3
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
7
9
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
Note that for exposure increments of 2 EV or more, the maximum number of shots is 5; if a higher value was selected in Step 2, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 215
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary exposure shot-by-shot according to the bracketing program selected; the modified values for shutter speed and aperture are shown in the display. Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation.
While bracketing is in effect, the display shows a bracketing icon, a bracketing progress indicator, and the number of shots remaining in the bracketing sequence. After each shot, a segment will disappear from the indicator and the number of shots remaining will be reduced by one.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
❚❚
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots .
216 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Exposure Bracketing
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(mode P ), aperture (mode S ), or shutter speed (modes A and M ). If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in modes P , S , and A , the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded; in mode M , the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 217
White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with a different white balance.
1
Choose WB bracketing.
Select WB bracketing for Auto bracketing set .
2
Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press 4 or 2 to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than 0F , a bracketing icon will appear in the display.
218 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3
Choose a bracketing increment.
Highlight Increment and press 4 or
2 to choose the bracketing increment. Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired. Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired),
2 (10 mired), or 3 (15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber. The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.
“Number of shots”
0F
B3F
A3F
B2F
A2F
3F
5F
7F
9F
Bracketing indicator
2
3
3
2
5
No. of shots Increment Bracketing order
0
3
1
1B
0
0/B1/B2
1A
1B
1A
0/A2/A1
0/B1
0/A1
0/A1/B1
7
9
1A, 1B
0/A2/A1/B1/B2
0/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3
0/A4/A3/A2/A1/
B1/B2/B3/B4
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 219
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a different white balance.
Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining, the shutter release will be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted.
❚❚
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots .
D White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option cancels white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amberblue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display). No adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the bracketing program will be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 ( Self-timer ) > Number of shots .
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded.
220 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.
1
Choose ADL bracketing .
Select ADL bracketing for Auto bracketing set .
2
Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press 4 or 2 to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another at the value selected in Step 3. Choose three to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active
D-Lighting set to Off , Low , and Normal (three shots), Off ,
Low , Normal , and High (four shots), or Off , Low , Normal ,
High , and Extra high (five shots). If you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.
At settings other than 0F , a bracketing icon will appear in the display.
3
Choose a value for Active
D-Lighting.
Highlight Amount and press 4 or 2 to choose an option. The chosen setting applies when 2F is selected for
Number of shots .
Amount
OFF L
OFF N
OFF H
OFF H +
OFF AUTO
Bracketing order
Off/Low
Off/Normal
Off/High
Off/Extra high
Off/Auto
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 221
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-byshot according to the bracketing program selected.
While bracketing is in effect, the display shows an ADL bracketing icon and the number of shots remaining in the bracketing sequence. After each shot, the number of shots remaining will be reduced by one.
❚❚
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, select 0F for Number of shots .
D ADL Bracketing
In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
222 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Multiple Exposure
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
The following options are available:
• Multiple exposure mode : Choose from On (series) (take a series of multiple exposures, ending when Off is selected), On (single photo) (take one multiple exposure), or Off (exit without creating additional multiple exposures).
• Number of shots : Choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph.
• Overlay mode : Choose from the options below.
Add : The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is not adjusted.
Average : Before the exposures are overlaid, the gain for each is divided by the total number of exposures (the gain for each exposure is set to 1 /
2
for 2 exposures, 1 /
3
for 3 exposures, etc).
Lighten : The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the brightest.
+
Darken : The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the darkest.
+
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 223
• Keep all exposures : Choose On to save the individual shots that make up each multiple exposure, Off to discard the individual shots and save only the multiple exposure.
• Overlay shooting : If On is selected, earlier exposures will be superimposed on the view through the lens during shooting.
• Select first exposure (NEF) : Choose the first exposure from the NEF
(RAW) images on the memory card.
Creating a Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to shoot a multiple exposure.
1
Select Multiple exposure .
Highlight Multiple exposure in the photo shooting menu and press 2 .
2
Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure mode and press 2 , then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired mode and press
J to select.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is selected, an icon will appear in the display.
224 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3
Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press
2 . Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press J .
4
Choose the overlay mode.
Highlight Overlay mode and press
2 , then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired mode and press J to select.
5
Choose whether to keep individual exposures.
To choose whether to keep or delete the individual shots that make up the multiple exposure, highlight Keep all exposures and press 2 , then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired option and press J to select.
6
Choose whether to view progress in the display.
To choose whether earlier exposures are superimposed over the view through the lens as shooting progresses, highlight Overlay shooting and press 2 , then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired option and press J to select.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 225
7
Choose the first exposure.
To choose the first exposure from existing NEF (RAW) photos, highlight
Select first exposure (NEF) and press 2 . Use the multi selector to highlight the desired image and press
J to select (to view the highlighted image full screen, touch and hold the X button).
8
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Continue shooting until all exposures have been taken and the final photograph has been recorded
(if you selected an existing NEF
(RAW) image as the first exposure in
Step 7, shooting will start from the second exposure). If On (single photo) was selected in Step 2, multiple exposure shooting will end when the photo is recorded; otherwise, you can continue taking multiple exposures until multiple exposure shooting is turned off.
226 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Release Mode
In continuous release modes, the camera records all exposures in a single burst. If On (series) is selected, a new multiple exposure will start as each previous multiple exposure ends; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first multiple exposure is recorded. In self-timer mode, the camera will automatically record the number of exposures selected in Step 3, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 ( Self-timer ) > Number of shots ; the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom
Setting c2 ( Self-timer ) > Interval between shots . In other release modes, one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded.
D Image Quality
Multiple exposures shot with an NEF (RAW) option selected for image quality will be recorded in JPEG fine format.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 227
The
i
Menu
The options listed below can be accessed during multiple exposure shooting by pressing the K button followed by the i button. Highlight items and press J to select.
• View progress : View a preview created from the exposures recorded to the current point.
• Retake last exposure : Retake the most recent exposure.
• Save and exit : Create a multiple exposure from the exposures taken to current point.
• Discard and exit : Exit without recording a multiple exposure. If On is selected for Keep all exposures , the individual exposures will be kept.
D Multiple Exposure
Shooting may also end if camera settings are changed before the exposure is complete. The shooting settings and photo info for multiple exposure photographs are those for the first exposure.
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure.
Multiple exposures may be affected by noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines).
D Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards cannot be formatted and some menu items are grayed out and cannot be changed.
228 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Ending Multiple Exposures
To end a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken, select Off for Multiple exposure mode or press the K button followed by the i button and select either Save and exit or Discard and exit . If shooting ends or you select Save and exit before the specified number of exposures have been taken, a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. If Average is selected for Overlay mode , gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if the standby timer expires.
D The Standby Timer
Menus and playback can be used between exposures, but note that if no operations are performed for about 40 seconds during playback or
90 seconds while menus are displayed, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures recorded to that point. The time available to record the next exposure can be extended by choosing longer times for Custom Setting c3 ( Power off delay ) >
Playback and Menus .
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 229
HDR (High Dynamic Range)
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures. HDR is most effective when used with matrix metering (with spot or center-weighted metering, an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent to about
2 EV). It cannot be combined with some camera features, including NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+ image quality settings, flash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, shutter speeds of
Bulb and Time , or interval timer, or time-lapse recording.
+
First exposure (darker) Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR image
The following options are available:
• HDR mode : Choose from On (series) (take a series of HDR photographs, ending when Off is selected), On (single photo)
(take one HDR photograph), and Off (exit without taking additional HDR photographs).
• Exposure differential : Choose the difference in exposure between the two shots that are combined to make an HDR photograph.
Choose larger values for high-contrast subjects, or select Auto to let the camera adjust the exposure differential according to the scene.
• Smoothing : Choose how much to smooth the boundaries between the shots that make up each HDR photograph.
230 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
• Save individual images (NEF) : Choose On to save each of the individual shots used to create the HDR image. The photos are saved as NEF (RAW) files regardless of the options selected for image quality in the photo shooting menu.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 231
Taking HDR Photographs
Follow the steps below to shoot HDR photographs.
1
Select HDR (high dynamic range) .
Highlight HDR (high dynamic range) in the photo shooting menu and press 2 .
2
Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and press 2 .
Highlight one of the following and press J .
• To take a series of HDR photographs , select 0 On (series) . HDR shooting will continue until you select Off for HDR mode .
• To take one HDR photograph , select On (single photo) . Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have created a single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs , select Off .
If On (series) or On (single photo) is selected, an icon will appear in the display.
232 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3
Choose the exposure differential.
To choose the difference in exposure between the two shots, highlight
Exposure differential and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
Choose higher values for highcontrast subjects, but note that choosing a value higher than required may not produce the desired results; if Auto is selected, the camera will automatically adjust exposure to suit the scene.
4
Choose the amount of smoothing.
To choose how much the boundaries between the two images are smoothed, highlight Smoothing and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
Higher values produce a smoother composite image. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 233
5
Choose whether to keep individual exposures.
To choose whether to save the individual NEF (RAW) images that make up the HDR photograph, highlight Save individual images
(NEF) and press 2 , then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired option and press J to select.
6
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down. Regardless of the option currently selected for release mode, only one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR turns off automatically after the photograph is taken.
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image will be cropped out. The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, shadows may appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects; this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of smoothing.
234 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Interval Timer Shooting
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of shots has been recorded. Select a release mode other than Self-timer ( E ) when using the interval timer.
Selecting Interval timer shooting displays the options below.
• Start : Start interval timer shooting, either after 3 s ( Now selected for Choose start day/time ) or at a selected date and time ( Choose day/time ). Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken.
• Choose start day/time : Choose a start option. To start shooting immediately, select Now . To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose day/time .
• Interval : Choose the interval (hours, minutes, and seconds) between shots.
• Intervals×shots/interval : Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval.
• Exposure smoothing : Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match previous shot in modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto
ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
• Silent photography : Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 235
• Interval priority : Select On to ensure that photos shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, choose a focus mode of MF or AF-C and check that the minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval.
If AF-C is selected for focus mode, check that Release is chosen for Custom Setting a1( AF-C priority selection ).
• Starting storage folder : Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect. Choose New folder to create a new folder for each new sequence, Reset file numbering to reset file numbering to 0001 when a new folder is created.
236 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Interval Timer Photography
D Before Shooting
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view the results. We recommend using a tripod and selecting Off for Optical VR in the photo shooting menu. Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use.
1
Select Interval timer shooting .
Highlight Interval timer shooting in the photo shooting menu and press 2 .
Interval timer shooting options will be displayed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 237
2
Adjust interval timer settings.
Adjust the following settings:
• Choose start day/time : Choose the starting date and time.
Highlight Choose start day/ time and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
To start shooting immediately, select Now . To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose day/time , then choose the date and time and press J .
• Interval : Choose the interval, in hours, minutes, and seconds.
Highlight Interval and press 2 .
Choose an interval and press J .
238 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
• Intervals×shots/interval : Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval.
Highlight Intervals×shots/ interval and press 2 .
Choose the number of intervals and shots/interval and press J .
In single frame release mode, the photographs for each interval will be taken at the rate for continuous high-speed release mode. When silent photography is enabled, the number of shots per interval is fixed at one.
• Exposure smoothing : Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight Exposure smoothing and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
• Silent photography : Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight Silent photography and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 239
• Interval priority : Enable or disable Interval priority .
Highlight Interval priority and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
• Starting storage folder : Choose starting folder options.
Highlight Starting storage folder and press 2 .
Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect; press J to proceed.
3
Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J . The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time, or after about
3 s if Now was selected for Choose start day/time in Step 2. The display turns off during shooting; shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken.
240 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the memory card access lamp will flash.
If the display is turned on by pressing the shutter-release button halfway, the message “Interval timer shooting“ will be displayed and the Q icon will flash.
Settings can be adjusted, the menus used, and pictures played back while interval timer photography is in progress. The display will turn off automatically shortly before each interval. Note that changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause shooting to end.
❚❚
Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals as follows:
• If Now is selected for Choose start day/time , interval timer photography can be paused by pressing J (pressing J between shots may have no effect if the time selected for
Interval is very short, in which case interval timer photography can be paused by turning the camera off )
• If Choose day/time is selected for Choose start day/time , interval timer photography can be paused by selecting
Interval timer shooting in the photo shooting menu, highlighting Pause , and pressing J
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 241
❚❚
Resuming Interval Timer Photography
To resume shooting immediately, select Restart .
Highlight Restart and press J .
To resume shooting at a specified time:
In the interval timer menu, highlight
Choose day/time and press 2 .
Choose a starting date and time and press J .
Highlight Restart and press J .
❚❚
Ending Interval Timer Shooting
Interval timer photography can be ended as follows:
• If Now is selected for Choose start day/time , interval timer photography can be ended by pressing J between shots to pause shooting and then highlighting Off in the Interval timer shooting menu and pressing J (pressing J between shots may have no effect if the time selected for Interval is very short, in which case interval timer photography can be paused by turning the camera off )
• If Choose day/time is selected for Choose start day/time , interval timer photography can be paused by selecting
Interval timer shooting in the photo shooting menu, highlighting Pause , and pressing J
242 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
❚❚
No Photograph
Photographs will not be taken at the selected interval if the current interval ends before the photograph or photographs for the previous interval have been taken or the memory card is full.
D Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken. Resume shooting after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
D Interval Timer Photography
Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected number of shots and, if you are using a flash, the time needed for the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the number of photos taken may be less than the total listed in Step 2 (the number of intervals multiplied by the number of shots per interval) or the flash may fire at less than the power needed for full exposure. Interval timer photography will not start if the interval is set to 00:00’0.5” and both
Silent photography and Interval priority are enabled. Interval timer photography cannot be combined with some camera features, including movie recording, time-lapse movies, long time-exposures
(bulb or time photography), multiple exposure, and HDR (high dynamic range). Note that because the shutter speed, frame rate, and time needed to record images may vary from one interval to the next, the time between the end of one interval and the beginning of the next may vary. If shooting cannot proceed or changes cannot be applied at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of Bulb or
Time is currently selected in mode M , the interval is zero, or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed.
Interval timer shooting will pause when Self-timer ( E ) is selected for release mode or if the camera is turned off and then on again (when the camera is off, batteries and memory cards can be replaced without ending interval timer photography). Pausing shooting does not affect interval timer settings.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 243
D Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval.
D Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program. Note that bracketing cannot be used during interval timer photography when On is selected for Interval priority .
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features, including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 1 and Hi 2
• Flash photography
• Long exposure noise reduction
• Flicker reduction
244 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Time-Lapse Movie
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a silent time-lapse movie.
Selecting Time-lapse movie displays the options below.
• Start : Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3 s and continues at the selected interval for the selected shooting time.
• Interval : Choose the interval between shots in minutes and seconds.
• Shooting time : Choose how long the camera will continue to take pictures (hours and minutes).
• Exposure smoothing : Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure in modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
• Silent photography : Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
• Frame size/frame rate : Choose the frame size and rate for the final movie.
• Interval priority : Select On to ensure that frames shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen interval, Off to ensure that photos are correctly exposed. If On is selected, choose a focus mode of MF or AF-C and check that the minimum shutter speed chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu is faster than the interval.
If AF-C is selected for focus mode, check that Release is chosen for Custom Setting a1( AF-C priority selection ).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 245
Recording Time-Lapse Movies
D Before Shooting
Before shooting a time-lapse movie, select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date, and then take a test shot at current settings and view the results. Time-lapse movies are shot using the movie crop; to check the composition, tap the X button in the Time-lapse movie display (to return to the Time-lapse movie display, tap the W button). For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than
4 (auto) or D (natural light auto).
We recommend using a tripod and selecting Off for Optical VR in the photo shooting menu. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use.
1
Select Time-lapse movie .
Highlight Time-lapse movie in the photo shooting menu and press 2 .
Time-lapse movie options will be displayed.
246 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
2
Adjust time-lapse movie settings.
Adjust the following settings:
• Interval : The interval (in minutes and seconds) should be longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed.
Highlight Interval and press 2 .
Choose an interval and press J .
• Shooting time : The total shooting time (in hours and minutes) can be up to 7 hours and 59 minutes.
Highlight Shooting time and press 2 .
Choose a shooting time and press J .
• Exposure smoothing : Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight Exposure smoothing and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 247
• Silent photography : Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight Silent photography and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
• Frame size/frame rate : Choose the frame size and rate at which the final movie will play back.
Highlight Frame size/ frame rate and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
• Interval priority : Enable or disable Interval priority .
Highlight Interval priority and press 2 .
Highlight an option and press J .
248 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3
Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J .
Shooting starts after about 3 s. The display turns off and the camera takes photographs at the selected interval for the selected shooting time.
D During Shooting
During shooting, the memory card access lamp will light. Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 ( Power off delay
Standby timer , the standby timer will not expire during shooting.
To end shooting ( 0 250) or view such
settings as exposure smoothing, the interval, and the time remaining, press the
G button between shots (the time-lapse movie dialog may not be displayed if the interval is very short). Note that you cannot adjust settings, play pictures back, or use the menus while shooting is in progress.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 249
❚❚
Ending Shooting
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J between shots. You also have the option of pressing the G button to display the Time-lapse movie menu, highlighting Off , and pressing J . If, however, the time selected for Interval is very short, pressing J between shots may have no effect or the
Time-lapse movie menu may not be displayed when the G button is pressed, in which case you will need to turn the camera off.
• When shooting ends, a movie will be created from the frames shot to that point and the camera will exit to shooting mode.
Note that if the battery is removed or the memory card is ejected, shooting ends (but no beep will sound) and no movie will be recorded.
D Calculating the Length of the Final Movie
The total number of frames in the final movie can be calculated by dividing the shooting time by the interval, rounding up, and adding 1.
The length of the final movie can then be calculated by dividing the number of shots by the frame rate selected for Frame size/frame rate .
A 48-frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080; 24p, for example, will be about two seconds long. The maximum length for time-lapse movies is 20 minutes.
Frame size/frame rate
Memory card indicator Length recorded/ maximum length
250 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Time-Lapse Movies
Time-lapse cannot be combined with some camera features, including movie recording, long time-exposures (bulb or time photography), the self-timer, bracketing, HDR (high dynamic range), multiple exposure, and interval timer photography. Active D-Lighting is disabled automatically. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. Changes to settings will not be applied and shooting will not begin if a time-lapse movie cannot be recorded at current settings (for example, if the memory card is full, the interval or shooting time is zero, or the interval is longer than the shooting time).
Shooting may end if camera controls are used or settings are changed or HDMI cable is connected. A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where shooting ended.
D Image Review
The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a few seconds after each shot if On or On (monitor only) is selected for Image review in the playback menu (the frame may not be displayed if the interval is very short). Other playback operations cannot be performed while the frame is displayed.
D Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features, including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 1 and Hi 2
• Flash photography
• Long exposure noise reduction
• Flicker reduction
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 251
Silent Photography
G button ➜ C (photo shooting menu)
Select On to reduce vibrations caused by the shutter when shooting landscapes and other static subjects (
tripod is recommended. Pictures are taken using the electronic shutter, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d4
( Shutter type ). Regardless of the option selected for Beep options in the setup menu, a beep will not sound when the camera focuses or the self-timer is counting down, and both the flash and long-exposure noise reduction will be disabled. In continuous release modes, the frame advance rate will change
252 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
1
The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting
Options
To view the movie shooting menu, select the 1 tab in the camera menus.
Option
Reset movie shooting menu
File naming
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Movie file type
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Diffraction compensation
0
Option
Auto distortion control
Flicker reduction
Metering
Release mode (save frame)
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Electronic VR
Microphone sensitivity
Attenuator
Frequency response
Wind noise reduction
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Movie Shooting Menu Defaults” (
0
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 253
Reset Movie Shooting Menu
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Select Yes to restore movie shooting menu options to their default values (
File Naming
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which movies are stored. The default prefix is “DSC” (
Frame Size/Frame Rate
G button
➜
1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more information, see “Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality”
Movie Quality
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose from High quality and Normal .
Movie File Type
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Record movies in MOV or MP4 format.
254 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Adjust the following ISO sensitivity settings.
• Maximum sensitivity : Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control from values between ISO 200 and
25600. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in modes P , S , and A and when On is selected for Auto ISO control (mode M) in mode M .
• Auto ISO control (mode M) : Select On to enable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M , Off to use the value selected for ISO sensitivity (mode M) .
• ISO sensitivity (mode M) : Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M from values between ISO 100 and 25600. Auto ISO sensitivity control is used in other modes.
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing and noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase. This can be prevented by choosing a lower value for ISO sensitivity settings > Maximum sensitivity .
White Balance
G button
➜
1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose the white balance for movies
(
Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 255
Set Picture Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose a Picture Control for movies
Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos.
Manage Picture Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Create custom Picture Controls ( 0 202).
Active D-Lighting
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating movies with natural contrast. Select Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for
High ISO NR
G button
➜
1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies recorded at high ISO sensitivities (
256 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Vignette Control
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce vignetting in movies ( 0 207). Select
Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos.
Diffraction Compensation
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce diffraction in movies (
Auto Distortion Control
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce barrel and pin-cushion distortion in movies (
Flicker Reduction
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting movies under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting. Choose Auto to allow the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.
D “Flicker Reduction” in the Movie Shooting Menu
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher fnumber). To prevent flicker, select mode M and choose a shutter speed adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: 1 /
125 s, 1 /
60 s, or 1 /
30 s for 60 Hz; 1 /
100 s, 1 /
50 s, or 1 /
25 s for 50 Hz.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 257
Metering
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose how the camera meters exposure in movie mode
( 0 127). Spot metering is not available.
Release Mode (Save Frame)
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
You can choose the release mode for photographs taken in
Option
U c
Single frame
Continuous
Description
The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed. Regardless of the option selected, a maximum of 40 photos can be taken with each movie.
The camera takes photographs while the shutterrelease button is held down; the length of time available for the burst is shown in the shooting display. The frame rate varies with the option selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu. Only one photograph can be taken at a time while movie recording is in progress.
Focus Mode
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose a focus mode for movie recording ( 0 51).
AF-Area Mode
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose how the camera focuses in movie mode (
258 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Optical VR
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose an optical vibration reduction option for movie recording (
Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos.
Electronic VR
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in movie mode.
Microphone Sensitivity
G button
➜
1 (movie shooting menu)
Turn built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity.
Choose Auto to adjust sensitivity automatically or Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select microphone sensitivity manually, select
Manual and choose a sensitivity.
D The 2 Icon
Movies that were recorded without sound are indicated by a 2 icon in movie and fullframe playback.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 259
Attenuator
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Select Enable to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion when recording movies in loud environments.
Frequency Response
G button
➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
If S Wide range is selected, built-in and external microphones will respond to a wide range of frequencies, from music to the bustling hum of a city street. Choose T Vocal range to bring out human voices.
Wind Noise Reduction
G button ➜ 1 (movie shooting menu)
Choose whether to enable wind-noise reduction during movie recording. For more information, see “Wind Noise Reduction”
260 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
A
Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To view Custom Settings, select the
A tab in the camera menus.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 261
The following Custom Settings are available:
Custom Setting 1
Reset custom settings a Autofocus a1 AF-C priority selection a2 Auto-area AF face/eye detection a3 Focus points used a4 AF activation a5 Focus point wrap-around a6 Focus point options a7 Low-light AF a8 Built-in AF-assist illuminator a9 Manual focus ring in AF mode 2 b Metering/exposure b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl b2 Easy exposure compensation b3 Center-weighted area b4 Fine-tune optimal exposure c Timers/AE lock c1 Shutter-release button AE-L c2 Self-timer c3 Power off delay
0
262 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Custom Setting 1 d Shooting/display d1 CL mode shooting speed d2 Max. continuous release d3 Exposure delay mode d4 Shutter type d5 Limit selectable image area d6 File number sequence d7 Apply settings to live view d8 Framing grid display d9 Peaking highlights d10 View all in continuous mode e Bracketing/flash e1 Flash sync speed e2 Flash shutter speed e3 Exposure comp. for flash e4 Auto c ISO sensitivity control e5 Bracketing order f Controls f1 Customize i menu f2 Custom controls (shooting) f3 Custom controls (playback) f4 Customize command dials f5 Release button to use dial f6 Reverse indicators
0
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 263
Custom Setting 1 g Movie g1 Customize i menu g2 Custom controls g3 AF speed g4 AF tracking sensitivity g5 Highlight display
1 Items modified from default values are indicated by asterisks (“ U “).
2 Available with compatible lenses only.
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Custom Settings Menu Defaults” ( 0 172).
0
Reset Custom Settings
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values
264 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses in focus mode AF-C .
Option
G
F
Release
Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed ( release priority ).
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus
( focus priority ).
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is selected for focus mode. The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released.
a2: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces or on faces and eyes when auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
Option
Face and eye detection on
Face detection on
Off
Description
When the camera detects a portrait subject, it automatically focuses on one or the other of the subject’s eyes, or on the subject’s face if the eyes are not detected.
When the camera detects a portrait subject, it automatically focuses on the subject’s face.
Face and eye detection disabled.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 265
a3: Focus Points Used
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection.
R
Option
All points
I Every other point
Description
Every focus point available in the current AF-area mode can be selected.
The number of available focus points is reduced by three quarters (the number of focus points available in
Wide-area AF (L) mode does not change). Use for quick focus-point selection.
a4: AF Activation
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus
( Shutter/AF-ON ) or if focus can only be adjusted using the controls to which AF-ON has been assigned ( AF-ON only ).
a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display to another. If Wrap is selected, focus-point selection will “wrap around” from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right, so that, for example, pressing the 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display.
266 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a6: Focus Point Options
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose from the following focus point display options:
• Manual focus mode : Choose On to display the active focus point in manual focus mode, Off to display the focus point only during focus point selection.
• Dynamic-area AF assist : If On is selected, both the selected focus point and the surrounding focus points will be displayed in dynamic-area AF mode. Choose Off to display only the selected focus point.
a7: Low-Light AF
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On for more accurate focus under low light (applies only when AF-S is selected for focus mode or when AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-S ).
• This option only takes effect in photo mode.
• In b , h , and q modes, Low-light AF is fixed at On .
• The camera may require more time to focus when On is selected.
• While low-light AF is in effect,
“Low-light” will appear in the display and the display refresh rate may drop.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 267
a8: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation in photo mode when lighting is poor.
Option
On
Off
Description
The illuminator lights as required when AF-S is selected for focus mode or AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-S .
The illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation.
The camera may not be able to focus when lighting is poor.
D The AF-Assist Illuminator
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1–3 m (3 ft 4 in.–
9 ft 10 in.); when using the illuminator, remove the lens hood. Do not obstruct the AF-assist illuminator while it is lit.
268 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a9: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in autofocus mode. Choose from the options below.
• Enable : Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway
(autofocus with manual override). To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release button and then press it halfway again.
• Disable : The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus while autofocus mode is selected.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 269
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, ISO sensitivity, bracketing, and exposure and flash compensation.
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether the E button is needed for exposure compensation.
• On (auto reset) : In modes P , S , and A , exposure compensation can be set by rotating the command dial not currently used for shutter speed or aperture (easy exposure compensation is not available in other modes). The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires (exposure compensation settings selected using the E button are not reset).
• On : As above, except that the exposure compensation value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
• Off : Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the main command dial.
270 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
b3: Center-Weighted Area
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the size of the area given the most weight in centerweighted metering.
b4: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the camera. Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method by from +1 to −1 EV in steps of 1 /
6
EV.
D Fine-Tuning Exposure
The exposure compensation ( E ) icon is not displayed when exposure fine-tuning is in effect. The only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 271
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is pressed.
O
Option
On (half press)
P On (burst mode)
Off
Description
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks exposure.
Exposure only locks while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock exposure.
c2: Self-Timer
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
• Self-timer delay : Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
• Number of shots : Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
• Interval between shots : Choose the interval between shots when
Number of shots is more than 1.
272 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
c3: Power Off Delay
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how long the camera displays remain on when no operations are performed. Different settings can be chosen for
Playback , Menus , Image review , and Standby timer ; note that each of these delays is extended by one minute in self-timer mode. Standby timer determines how long the monitor or viewfinder display remains on when no operations are performed during shooting (the monitor and viewfinder dim a few seconds before the standby timer expires). Choose shorter power-off delays for longer battery life.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 273
d: Shooting/Display
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous release mode.
d2: Max. Continuous Release
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1 and 100. Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter speed of 1 s or slower is selected in mode S or M .
D The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d2, shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills ( r00 ).
d3: Exposure Delay Mode
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to
3 seconds after the shutter-release button is pressed.
274 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d4: Shutter Type
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the type of shutter used for photographs.
O
P x
Option
Auto
Mechanical shutter
Electronic frontcurtain shutter
Description
The camera chooses the shutter type automatically according to shutter speed. The electronic front-curtain shutter is used to reduce blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
The camera uses the mechanical shutter for all photos.
The camera uses the electronic front-curtain shutter for all photos.
D “Mechanical Shutter”
Mechanical shutter is not available with some lenses.
D “Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter”
The fastest shutter speed available when Electronic front-curtain shutter is selected is 1 /
2000 s.
d5: Limit Selectable Image Area
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options available when image-area selection is assigned to the i menu or to the command dials and a camera control. Highlight the desired options and press 2 to select or deselect. Press J to save changes when settings are complete.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 275
d6: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
When a picture is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
On
Off
Reset
Description
File numbering continues from the last number used. This simplifies file management by minimizing the occurrence of duplicate file names.
File numbering restarts from 0001 or from the largest file number in the current folder (if you turn sequential file numbering off and then on again, file numbering will resume from the last number used).
As for On , except that the next picture taken after Reset is selected is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to 0001.
D File Number Sequence
If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and file numbering will restart from 0001. The new folder is assigned a number one higher than current folder number or, if a folder with that number already exists, the lowest available folder number. If the current folder is numbered 999, the camera will not be able to create a new folder and the shutter release will be disabled (in addition, movie recording may be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a movie of the maximum length would result in the folder containing over 5000 files or a file with a number over 9999). To resume shooting, choose Reset for Custom Setting d6 ( File number sequence ) and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
276 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d7: Apply Settings to Live View
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On to preview how changes to such settings as white balance, Picture Controls, and exposure compensation affect color and brightness in photo mode, or select Off to adjust brightness and hue for ease of viewing (regardless of the option selected, the effects of the aforementioned settings are always visible in movie mode). A g icon is displayed when Off is selected.
d8: Framing Grid Display
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose On to display a grid for reference when framing shots.
d9: Peaking Highlights
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display.
Choose the peaking level and outline color.
• Peaking level : Choose from 3 (high sensitivity) , 2 (standard) ,
1 (low sensitivity) , and Off ; the higher the value, the greater the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
• Peaking highlight color : Choose the highlight color.
d10: View All in Continuous Mode
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
If Off is selected, the display will go blank during burst photography.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 277
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the flash sync speed.
• 1/200 s (Auto FP) : Selecting this option (available only when an optional flash unit is attached) enables auto FP high-speed sync with compatible flash units; the maximum sync speed for other flash units is set to 1 /
200 s. When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1 /
200 s in mode P or A , auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 /
200 s, and shutter speeds as fast as 1 /
4000 s can be selected by the camera (modes P and A ) or by the user (modes S and M ).
• 1/200 s–1/60 s : Set the maximum flash sync speed to the selected value.
D Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Auto FP high-speed sync allows optional flash units to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even in bright sunlight.
278 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the slowest shutter speed available when front- or rearcurtain sync or red-eye reduction is used in mode P or A
(regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync).
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used.
Y E
Option
Entire frame
E Background only
Description
Both flash level and exposure compensation are adjusted to modify exposure over the entire frame.
Exposure compensation applies to background only.
e4: Auto
c
ISO Sensitivity Control
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled.
Option e Subject and background f Subject only
Description
The camera takes both the main subject and background lighting into account when adjusting ISO sensitivity.
ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main subject is correctly exposed.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 279
e5: Bracketing Order
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
At the default setting of MTR > under > over ( H ), exposure, flash, and white balance bracketing are performed in the following order: the unmodified shot is taken first, followed by the shot with the lowest value, followed by the shot with the highest value. If Under > MTR > over ( I ) is selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
280 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f: Controls
f1: Customize
i
Menu
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options displayed in the i menu for photo mode.
The following options can be assigned to any position in the menu by highlighting the desired position, pressing J , and choosing the desired option.
Option
J Choose image area
0
8 Image quality o Image size
E
Exposure compensation
9 m
ISO sensitivity settings
White balance
h Set Picture Control p Color space y Active D-Lighting q Long exposure NR r High ISO NR w Metering c Flash mode
Y Flash compensation
s t u
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Optical VR
Option t Auto bracketing
$ Multiple exposure
2 HDR (high dynamic range)
L Silent photography v Release mode w Custom controls
(shooting)
0
z Exposure delay mode
O Shutter type y
W Peaking highlights
3
Apply settings to live view
Monitor/viewfinder brightness
Z Bluetooth connection
U Wi-Fi connection
L Wireless remote connection
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 281
f2: Custom Controls (Shooting)
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
To choose the functions assigned to the following controls in photo mode, whether used individually or in combination with the command dials, highlight the desired option and press J .
w Fn1 button y Fn2 button j AE-L/AF-L button k OK button
S Lens Fn button z Movie record button l Lens control ring
The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option
K Select center focus point
A AF-ON
F AF lock only
E AE lock (Hold)
D AE lock (Reset on release)
C AE lock only
B AE/AF lock r FV lock h Flash off q Preview
1 Bracketing burst
4 + NEF (RAW) b Framing grid display w y j k z S l
— — —
✔
— — —
✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔
—
✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔
—
✔ ✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔
—
✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔
—
✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔
—
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
✔ ✔
— —
✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
✔ ✔
— —
✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔
— —
✔ ✔
—
282 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
p
O
3
K
J
8
E
9
Zoom on/off
MY MENU
Access top item in MY MENU
Playback
Choose image area
Image quality/size m White balance h Set Picture Control y Active D-Lighting w Metering
I / Y Flash mode/compensation v Release mode z Focus mode/AF-area mode t Auto bracketing
$ Multiple exposure
2 HDR (high dynamic range) z Exposure delay mode
W Peaking highlights
X Focus (M/A) q Aperture
Exposure compensation
ISO sensitivity
None
Option w y j k z S l
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔ —
✔ ✔
— —
✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔ — — — ✔ —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔ — — ✔ — —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— — — — —
— — — — — —
✔
1, 2
— — — — — —
✔ 2
— — — — — —
✔
2
— — — — — — ✔ 2
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
2
1 Available only with compatible lenses.
2 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control ring can only be used to adjust focus.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 283
The following options are available:
Option
K Select center focus point
Description
Pressing the control selects the center focus point.
A AF-ON Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
F AF lock only Focus locks while the control is pressed.
E AE lock (Hold)
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and remains locked until the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
D r
AE lock (Reset on release)
FV lock
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and remains locked until the control is pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer expires.
C AE lock only Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the control is pressed.
Press the control to lock flash value for the built-in flash or optional flash units. Press again to cancel
FV lock.
h q
1
Flash off
Preview
Bracketing burst
If the flash is currently enabled, it will be disabled while the control is pressed.
Keep the control pressed to preview color, exposure, and depth of field.
If the control is pressed while exposure or ADL bracketing is active in single frame release mode, all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. If white balance bracketing is active or a continuous release mode is selected, the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutterrelease button is held down.
284 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
4 b p
Option
+ NEF (RAW)
Framing grid display
Zoom on/off
Description
If a JPEG option is currently selected for image quality, “RAW” will be displayed and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the control is pressed (the original image quality setting will be restored when you remove your finger from the shutter-release button). NEF
(RAW) copies are recorded at the setting currently selected for NEF (RAW) recording in the photo shooting menu. To exit without recording an NEF
(RAW) copy, press the control again.
Press the control to turn the framing grid display on or off.
Press the control to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point. Press the control again to zoom out.
Pressing the control displays “MY MENU”.
Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item.
O MY MENU
3 Access top item in
MY MENU
K Playback
J Choose image area
8 m
Image quality/size
White balance
Press the control to start playback.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the image area.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose an image quality option and the sub-command dial to select image size.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose a white balance option (in some cases, a sub-option can be selected using the subcommand dial).
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 285
w
Option h Set Picture
Control y Active
D-Lighting
I / Y Flash mode/ compensation v z t
$
2
Metering
Release mode
Focus mode/
AF-area mode
Auto bracketing
Multiple exposure
HDR (high dynamic range) z Exposure delay mode
Description
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a Picture Control.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust Active D-Lighting.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a metering option.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose a flash mode and the sub-command dial to adjust flash output.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose a release mode. In Continuous L or
Self-timer mode, you can rotate the subcommand dial to choose the frame advance rate or release delay.
Press the control and rotate the main and subcommand dials to choose the focus and AF-area modes.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots and the subcommand dial to select the bracketing increment or Active D-Lighting amount.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose the mode and the sub-command dial to choose the number of shots.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose the mode and the sub-command dial to choose the exposure differential.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the shutter-release delay.
286 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
W
X
Option
Peaking highlights
Focus (M/A)
Description
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose a peaking level and the subcommand dial to select the peaking color.
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the control ring while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (autofocus with manual override).
To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release button and then press it halfway again.
q Aperture
E Exposure compensation
Use the control to adjust aperture.
Use the control to adjust exposure compensation.
9 ISO sensitivity
None
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust ISO sensitivity.
The control has no effect.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 287
f3: Custom Controls (Playback)
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the roles assigned to the A ( L ) and J buttons during playback.
Highlight the desired control and press
J .
AE-L/AF-L Button
The following roles can be assigned to the A ( L ) button:
Option h
Same as j when shooting g c
Protect
Rating
Description
The control performs the function selected for
Custom Setting f2 ( Custom controls
(shooting) ) > j AE-L/AF-L button .
Press the control during playback to protect the current picture.
Press the control and then use the multi selector to rate the current picture during playback.
288 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
OK Button
Choose from the options below. Regardless of the option selected, pressing J when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie playback.
Option n Thumbnail on/ off o p u
View histograms
Zoom on/off
Choose folder
Description
Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback, a histogram is displayed while the J button is pressed.
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback and playback zoom (to choose the zoom ratio, highlight Zoom on/off and press 2 ). The zoom display is centered on the active focus point.
A folder-selection dialog will be displayed; highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures in the selected folder.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 289
f4: Customize Command Dials
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Customize the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
• Reverse rotation : Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected operations. Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect, and then press J to save changes and exit.
• Change main/sub : Choose the roles played by the command dials for exposure and focus operations.
Exposure setting : If On is selected, the main command dial will control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If
On (Mode A) is selected, the main command dial will be used to set aperture in mode A only.
Autofocus setting : This option applies to the control assigned
Focus mode/AF-area mode using Custom Setting f2
( Custom controls (shooting) ). If On is selected, the focus mode can be chosen by keeping the control pressed and rotating the sub-command dial, AF-area mode by keeping the control pressed and rotating the main command dial.
290 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
• Menus and playback : Select Off to use the multi selector for menus and playback. If On or On (image review excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback and to highlight thumbnails and menu items. The sub-command dial is used in full-frame playback to skip forward or back according to the option selected for Sub-dial frame advance and in thumbnail playback to page up or down. While menus are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu for the highlighted option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2 or J . Select On
(image review excluded) to prevent the command dials from being used for playback during image review.
• Sub-dial frame advance : When On or On (image review excluded) is selected for Menus and playback , the subcommand dial can be rotated during full-frame playback to select a folder, to skip forward or back 10 or 50 frames at a time, or to skip to the next or previous protected picture, the next or previous photo, the next or previous movie, or the next or previous picture with a selected rating (to choose the rating, highlight Rating and press 2 ).
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 291
f5: Release Button to Use Dial
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. This ends when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires.
• This setting applies to the E and S buttons.
• It also applies to controls to which the following roles have been assigned via custom control assignment: Choose image area , Image quality/size , White balance , Set Picture
Control , Active D-Lighting , Metering , Flash mode/ compensation , Release mode , Focus mode/AF-area mode ,
Auto bracketing , Multiple exposure , HDR (high dynamic range) , Exposure delay mode , Peaking highlights , and
Microphone sensitivity .
f6: Reverse Indicators
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu) displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right. Select ( V ) to display positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
292 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
g: Movie
g1: Customize
i
Menu
G button
➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the options displayed in the i menu for movie mode.
The following options can be assigned to any position in the menu by highlighting the desired position, pressing J , and choosing the desired option.
Option
G Frame size and rate/
Image quality y w s t
Active D-Lighting
Metering
Focus mode
AF-area mode
0
E Exposure compensation
9
ISO sensitivity settings
m White balance
h Set Picture Control
u Optical VR
4 Electronic VR
Option 0
H Microphone sensitivity
5 Attenuator
6 Frequency response
7
Wind noise reduction v Release mode (save frame)
W Peaking highlights
9 Highlight display
3 Monitor/viewfinder brightness
Z
Bluetooth connection
U Wi-Fi connection
L
Wireless remote connection
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 293
g2: Custom Controls
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
To choose the functions assigned to the following controls in movie mode, whether used individually or in combination with the command dials, highlight the desired option and press J .
w Fn1 button y Fn2 button j AE-L/AF-L button k OK button l Lens control ring
The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option t Power aperture (open) q Power aperture (close) i Exposure compensation + h Exposure compensation – b Framing grid display
K Select center focus point
A AF-ON
F AF lock only
E AE lock (Hold)
C AE lock only
B AE/AF lock p Zoom on/off
1 Record movies m White balance w y j k l
✔
— — — —
—
✔
— — —
✔
— — — —
—
✔
— — —
✔ ✔
— — —
— — —
✔
—
— —
✔
— —
— —
✔
— —
— —
✔
— —
— —
✔
— —
— —
✔
— —
— —
✔ ✔
—
— —
✔ ✔
—
✔ ✔
— — —
294 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
h y w c z
H
E
9
Set Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
Metering
Release mode (save frame)
Focus mode/AF-area mode
Microphone sensitivity
W Peaking highlights
X Focus (M/A) q Power aperture
Exposure compensation
ISO sensitivity
None
Option w y j k l
✔ ✔
— — —
✔ ✔
— — —
✔ ✔
— — —
✔ ✔
— — —
✔ ✔
— — —
✔ ✔
— — —
✔ ✔
— — —
— — — —
✔
1, 2
— — — —
✔ 2
— — — —
✔
2
— — — —
✔ 2
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
2
1 Available only with compatible lenses.
2 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control ring can only be used to adjust focus.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 295
The following options are available: t q i h
Option
Power aperture
(open)
Power aperture
(close)
Exposure compensation +
Exposure compensation –
Description
Aperture widens while the control is pressed.
Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
( Custom controls ) > Fn2 button > Power aperture (close) for button-controlled aperture adjustment.
Aperture narrows while the control is pressed.
Use in combination with Custom Setting g2
( Custom controls ) > Fn1 button > Power aperture (open) for button-controlled aperture adjustment.
Exposure compensation increases while the control is pressed. Use in combination with
Custom Setting g2 ( Custom controls ) > Fn2 button > Exposure compensation − for button-controlled exposure compensation.
Exposure compensation decreases while the control is pressed. Use in combination with
Custom Setting g2 ( Custom controls ) > Fn1 button > Exposure compensation + for button-controlled exposure compensation.
Press the control to turn the framing grid display on or off.
b Framing grid display
K Select center focus point
Pressing the control selects the center focus point.
A AF-ON Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
F AF lock only Focus locks while the control is pressed.
E AE lock (Hold)
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and remains locked until the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
296 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option Description
C AE lock only Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the control is pressed.
p
1 m
Zoom on/off
Record movies
White balance
Press the control to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point. Press the control again to zoom out.
Press the control to start movie recording.
Recording ends when the control is pressed again.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose a white balance option (in some cases, a sub-option can be selected using the sub-command dial).
h Set Picture
Control y
Active
D-Lighting
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a Picture Control.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust Active D-Lighting.
w c z
H
W
Metering
Release mode
(save frame)
Focus mode/
AF-area mode
Microphone sensitivity
Peaking highlights
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a metering option.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the release mode for photographs taken during movie recording.
Press the control and rotate the main and subcommand dials to choose the focus and AF-area modes.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust microphone sensitivity.
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose a peaking level and the subcommand dial to select the peaking color.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 297
X
Option
Focus (M/A)
Description
Use the control to focus manually, independent of the option selected for focus mode. To refocus using autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway or press a control to which AF-ON has been assigned.
q Power aperture Use the control to adjust aperture.
E Exposure compensation
Use the control to adjust exposure compensation.
9 ISO sensitivity Use the control to adjust ISO sensitivity.
None The control has no effect.
D Power Aperture
Power aperture is available only in modes A and M (a 6 icon indicates that power aperture cannot be used). The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.
298 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
g3: AF Speed
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose the focus speed for movie mode.
To choose when the selected option applies, highlight When to apply and press 2 . Choose from Always (the selected option applies whenever the camera is in movie mode) and Only while recording (the selected option applies only while recording is in progress; at other times, the focus speed is “+5”, or in other words as fast possible).
g4: AF Tracking Sensitivity
G button
➜
A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose how quickly focus responds when your subject leaves the focus point or something passes between the subject and the camera in movie mode.
Choose from values between 7 (Low) and 1 (High) . The higher the value, the slower the response and the less likely you are to lose focus on your original subject when something passes between the subject and the camera. The lower the value, the quicker the camera is to respond to the subject leaving the focus area by shifting focus to a new subject in the same area.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 299
g5: Highlight Display
G button ➜ A (Custom Settings menu)
Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright areas of the frame) and select the level of brightness needed to trigger the highlight display.
• Display pattern : To enable the highlight display, select Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 .
Highlights
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
• Highlight display threshold : Choose the brightness needed to trigger the movie highlight display. The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as highlights. If 255 is selected, the highlight display will show only areas that are potentially overexposed.
D Highlight Display
If both the highlight display and peaking highlights are enabled, only peaking highlights will be displayed in manual focus mode. To view the highlight display, select Off for Custom Setting d9 ( Peaking highlights ) > Peaking level .
300 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
B
The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To view the setup menu, select the B tab in the camera menus.
Option
Format memory card
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Language
Time zone and date
Monitor brightness
Viewfinder brightness
Viewfinder color balance
Information display
AF fine-tune
Image Dust Off ref photo
Image comment
Copyright information
Beep options
0
Touch controls
Option
Self-portrait mode
HDMI
Location data display
Airplane mode
Connect to smart device
Connect to PC
0
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options
Conformity marking
Energy saving
Slot empty release lock
Reset all settings
Firmware version
D See Also
For menu defaults, see “Setup Menu Defaults” ( 0 176).
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 301
Format Memory Card
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Select Yes to format the memory card.
Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card.
Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required.
D During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
Save User Settings
G button
➜ B (setup menu)
Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial (
Reset User Settings
G button
➜ B (setup menu)
Reset settings for U1 and U2 to default values (
Language
G button
➜ B (setup menu)
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The languages available vary with the country or region in which the camera was originally purchased.
302 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Time Zone and Date
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off. Be sure to check the camera clock regularly against more accurate timepieces and adjust time and date settings as necessary.
Option
Time zone
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock.
Date format
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
Daylight saving time
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.
The default setting is Off .
If the clock is reset, a t indicator will be displayed.
Monitor Brightness
G button
➜
B (setup menu)
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
• Monitor brightness can only be adjusted when the monitor is the active display; it cannot be adjusted in the “viewfinder only” monitor mode or when your eye is to the viewfinder.
• Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 303
Viewfinder Brightness
Auto
Manual
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust viewfinder brightness.
• Viewfinder brightness can only be adjusted when the viewfinder is the active display; it cannot be adjusted when the viewfinder is off or in the “monitor only” monitor mode.
• Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Option Description
Viewfinder brightness is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions.
Press 1 or 3 to adjust brightness manually. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
304 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Viewfinder Color Balance
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust viewfinder color balance to your taste. Adjustments made using Viewfinder color balance must be made using the viewfinder. They cannot be made in the monitor or when
Monitor only is selected for monitor mode.
• Viewfinder color balance is adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1 , 3 , 4 , and 2 to adjust color balance as shown below. Press J to exit when adjustments are complete.
Increase green
Increase blue
Increase amber
Increase magenta
• Viewfinder color balance applies only to the menu, playback, and shooting displays; pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
• The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in playback mode, the picture last displayed. If the memory card contains no pictures, an empty frame will be displayed instead.
• To choose a different image, tap the
W button. Highlight the desired picture and press J to select it as the reference image.
• To view the highlighted image full frame, touch and hold the X button.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 305
Information Display
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust the color of the lettering in the information display for ease of viewing. Choose Dark on light ( w ) to display black letters on a white background or Light on dark ( x ) to display white letters on a dark background.
Dark on light Light on dark
306 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
AF Fine-Tune
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Fine-tune focus for up to 30 lens types. Use only as required. We recommend that you perform fine-tuning at a focus distance you use frequently; if you perform focus-tuning at a short focus distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer distances.
• AF fine-tune (On/Off) : Choose On to turn AF tuning on, Off to turn it off.
• Saved value : Tune AF for the current lens.
Press 1 to move focal point away from camera or 3 to move focal point toward camera; choose from values
Current value between +20 and –20. The camera can store values for up to 30 lens types.
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens.
Saved value
• Default : Choose the AF tuning value used when no previously saved value exists for the current lens.
• List saved values : List previously saved AF tuning values. To delete a lens from the list, highlight the desired lens and press
O . To change a lens identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens and press 2 . A menu will be displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an identifier and press J to save changes and exit.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 307
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX-D (for more information, refer to Capture NX-D online help).
A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended when recording Image Dust Off reference data. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
1
Select Start .
Highlight Start and press J . A message will be displayed.
2
Frame a featureless white object in the display.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the display and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
308 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
3
Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and a message will be displayed.
Choose another reference object and repeat the process from Step 1.
D Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 309
Image Comment
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D. The comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display. The following options are available:
• Input comment : Input a comment as described in “Text Entry”
(
0 186). Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment : Select this option to attach the comment to all subsequent photographs. Highlight Attach comment and press 2 to turn it on or off. After choosing the desired setting, press J to exit.
310 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Copyright Information
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D. The following options are available:
• Artist : Enter a photographer name as described in “Text Entry”
( 0 186). Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright : Enter the name of the copyright holder as described in “Text Entry” (
0 186). Copyright holder names can be up to
54 characters long.
• Attach copyright information : Select this option to attach copyright information to all subsequent photographs.
Highlight Attach copyright information and press 2 to turn it on or off. After choosing the desired setting, press J to exit.
D Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names, make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the
Copyright information option.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 311
Beep Options
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when:
• The self-timer is in operation
• Time-lapse recording ends
• The camera focuses in photo mode (note that a beep will not sound if AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C )
• The touch screen is used
Note that a beep will not sound while the self-timer is in operation or when the focuses if On is selected for Silent photography in the photo shooting menu.
The Beep options menu contains the following items:
• Beep on/off : Turn the beep speaker on or off, or select Off (touch controls only) to disable the beep during keyboard entry while enabling it for other purposes.
• Volume : Adjust beep volume.
• Pitch : Choose the pitch of the beep from High and Low .
Touch Controls
G button
➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
• Enable/disable touch controls : Select Disable to prevent accidental use of touch-screen controls, or Playback only to enable touch-screen controls in playback mode only.
• Full-frame playback flicks : Choose whether the next image in fullframe playback is displayed by flicking left or by flicking right.
312 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Self-Portrait Mode
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Select Disable to prevent the camera entering self-portrait mode when the monitor is in the self-portrait position.
HDMI
G button
➜ B (setup menu)
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices ( 0 396).
Location Data Display
G button
➜ B (setup menu)
View location data downloaded from smart devices using the
SnapBridge app. The items displayed vary with the smart device.
Airplane Mode
G button
➜
B (setup menu)
Select Enable to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and
Wi-Fi functions.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 313
Connect to Smart Device
Connect to smartphones or tablets
(smart devices) via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi.
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth.
Option Description
Start pairing Pair the camera with a smart device (
Paired devices
List paired smart devices or switch from one device to another.
Bluetooth connection
Select Enable to enable Bluetooth.
Select to Send (Bluetooth)
Select pictures for upload to a smart device or choose whether to mark pictures for upload as they are taken. Upload begins immediately when a connection is established.
Option
Auto select to send
Description
If On is selected, photos will be marked for upload to a smart device as they are taken (this does not apply to photos taken in movie mode, which must be selected for upload manually). Regardless of the option selected with the camera, photos are uploaded in JPEG format at a size of 2 megapixels.
Manual select to send
Mark selected pictures for upload.
Deselect all Remove transfer marking from all images.
314 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Wi-Fi Connection
Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi.
❚❚
Establish Wi-Fi Connection
Initiate a Wi-Fi connection to a smart device. To connect, select the camera SSID on the smart device and enter the password
(
0 367). Once a connection is established, this option will
change to Close Wi-Fi connection , which can be used to end the connection when desired.
❚❚
Wi-Fi Connection Settings
Access the following Wi-Fi settings:
• SSID : Set the camera SSID.
• Authentication/encryption : Choose OPEN or WPA2-PSK-AES .
• Password : Set the camera password.
• Channel : Select Auto to have the camera choose the channel automatically, or select Manual and choose the channel manually.
• Current settings : View current Wi-Fi settings.
• Reset connection settings : Select Yes to reset Wi-Fi settings to default values.
Send While Off
If On is selected, upload of images to smart devices connected via Bluetooth will continue even when the camera is off.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 315
Connect to PC
Connect to computers via Wi-Fi.
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Wi-Fi Connection
Select Enable to connect using the settings currently selected for Network settings .
316 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Network Settings
Select Create profile to create a new network profile (
353). If more than one profile already exists, you can press
J to select a profile from a list. To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press 2 . The following options will be displayed:
• General : The profile name and password. Select Profile name to rename the profile (by default, the profile name is the same as the network SSID). To require that a password be entered before the profile can be changed select On for Password protection (to change the password, highlight On and press
2 ).
• Wireless : Adjust settings for connection to a network via a router
(infrastructure mode) or for direct wireless connection to the camera (access-point mode).
Infrastructure mode : Enter the network SSID and password and choose the type of authentication/encryption used on the network ( OPEN or WPA2-PSK-AES ). The channel is selected automatically.
Access-point mode : Enter the SSID and choose a channel (select
Auto for automatic channel selection or Manual to choose the channel manually) and authentication/encryption type
( OPEN or WPA2-PSK-AES ) used for connection to the camera. If WPA2-PSK-AES is selected for Authentication/ encryption , you can also set the camera password.
• TCP/IP : If Enable is selected for Obtain automatically , the IP address and sub-net mask for infrastructure mode connections will be acquired via a DHCP server or automatic IP addressing.
Select Disable manually to enter the IP address ( Address ) and sub-net mask ( Mask ). Note that an IP address is required for infrastructure mode connections.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 317
Options
Adjust upload settings.
❚❚
Auto Send
Select On to upload new photos as they are taken. Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card; be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera. Movies and photos taken in movie mode are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete but must instead be
uploaded from the playback display ( 0 360).
❚❚
Delete After Send
Select Yes to delete photographs from the camera memory card automatically once upload is complete (files marked for transfer before this option is selected are not deleted). Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
❚❚
Send File As
When uploading NEF+JPEG images, choose whether to upload both the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy.
❚❚
Deselect All?
Select Yes to remove transfer marking from all images. Upload of images with a “sending” icon will immediately be terminated.
MAC Address
View the MAC address.
318 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Wireless Remote (ML-L7) Options
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Establish a Bluetooth connection to an optional ML-L7 remote control. You can also choose the roles assigned to the Fn1 and Fn2 buttons on the remote.
Wireless Remote Connection
Option
Enable
Disable
Description
Connect to a paired ML-L7. Any existing connection to a smart device or computer will end.
End the connection to the ML-L7.
Save Wireless Remote Controller
Ready the camera for pairing with an ML-L7 remote control.
When the camera is ready, press the power button on the remote controller for over three seconds until the devices are paired. The remote controller’s status lamp will flash green approximately once every three seconds when pairing is complete.
The camera can be paired with only one remote controller at a time. It can only be used with the controller with which it was most recently paired.
Delete Wireless Remote Controller
End an existing pairing connection between the camera and an
ML-L7.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 319
Assign
Fn1
Button/Assign
Fn2
Button
Choose the roles assigned to the ML-L7’s Fn1 and Fn2 buttons.
Option
Same as camera
K button
Same as camera
G button
Same as camera i button
None
Description
The button performs the same function as the camera
K button.
The button performs the same function as the camera
G button.
The button performs the same function as the camera i button.
Pressing the button has no effect.
A The Remote Controller Status LED
The status of an ML-L7 interacting with the camera is shown by the controller status lamp:
Color
Green
Orange
Red
Behavior
Flashes approximately once a second
Flashes quickly (approximately twice a second)
Flashes approximately once every three seconds
Flashes once
Flashes twice
Flashes once
Flashes twice
Status
Searching for paired camera.
Pairing.
Connected to camera.
Photography started.
Photography ended.
Movie recording started.
Movie recording ended.
Conformity Marking
G button
➜
B (setup menu)
View some of the standards with which the camera complies.
320 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Energy Saving
Enable
Disable
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
In photo mode, the shooting display will turn off to save power approximately 15 seconds before the standby timer expires.
Option Description
Enable energy saving. The display refresh rate may drop.
Disable energy saving. Note selecting Disable does not stop the shooting display dimming a few seconds before the standby expires.
D Note: Energy Saving
• Note that even when Enable is selected, energy saving will not function:
- If No limit is selected for Custom Setting c3 ( Power off delay ) >
Standby timer or if the delay selected is less than 30 seconds
- In self-portrait mode
- In U or 6 mode
- During display zoom
- While the camera is connected to another device via HDMI or USB
• Selecting Disable increases the drain on the battery.
Slot Empty Release Lock
G button
➜ B (setup menu)
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in demo mode). If
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 321
Reset All Settings
G button ➜ B (setup menu)
Reset all settings except Language and Time zone and date to their default values. Copyright information and other usergenerated entries are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
Firmware Version
G button
➜
B (setup menu)
View the current camera firmware version.
322 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
N
The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
To view the retouch menu, select the
N tab in the camera menus.
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera.
Option
7 NEF (RAW) processing k Trim
8 Resize i D-Lighting l Quick retouch j Red-eye correction
0
Option
Z Straighten a Distortion control e Perspective control o Image overlay 1
9 Trim movie
0
p Side-by-side comparison 2
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.
2 Can only be displayed by pressing i and selecting Retouch when a retouched image or original is displayed.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 323
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1
Select an item in the retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2 to select.
2
Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J . To view the highlighted picture full screen, touch and hold the X button.
D Retouch
In the case of images recorded at image quality settings of NEF +
JPEG, only the NEF (RAW) image will be retouched. The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created with other devices.
3
Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G .
D Power off Delay
The display will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no actions are performed for a brief period. Any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase the time the display remains on, choose a longer menu display time using Custom Setting c3 ( Power off delay ) > Menus .
324 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
4
Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy.
Retouched copies are indicated by a p icon.
D Retouching the Current Image
To create a retouched copy of the current image, press i and select
Retouch .
D Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although (with the exception of Trim movie ) each option can be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that cannot be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.
D Image Quality
• Cropped and resized copies created from NEF (RAW) images are saved at an Image quality of JPEG fine .
• Copies created from JPEG images are the same quality as the original.
D Image Size
Except in the case of copies created with NEF (RAW) processing , Trim , and Resize , copies are the same size as the original.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 325
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
“NEF (RAW) processing” is used to convert NEF (RAW) photographs to other formats, such as JPEG. To create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs on the camera, follow the steps below.
1
Select NEF (RAW) processing .
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch menu and press 2 .
2
Choose how images are selected.
Choose from the following options:
• Select image(s) : Select one or more images manually.
• Select date : Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images taken on selected dates.
• Select all images : Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images on the memory card (proceed to Step 4).
326 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3
Select photographs.
If you chose Select image(s) in Step
2, a picture selection dialog will be displayed listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
Highlight images using the multi selector and tap the W button to select or deselect; selected images are indicated by a L icon.
To view the highlighted image full screen, touch and hold the
X button. Press J to proceed to Step 4 when your selection is complete.
If you chose Select date in Step 2, a list of dates will be displayed.
Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select or deselect. Press J to select all NEF
(RAW) pictures taken on the chosen dates and proceed to Step 4.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 327
4
Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
Adjust the settings listed below, or select Original (if available) to use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken (the original settings are listed below the preview).
Note that exposure compensation can only be set to values between −2 and +2 EV.
1
2
3
4
5
1
Image quality........................... 122
2
Image size ................................. 124
3
White balance....................63, 116
4
Exposure compensation...........98
5
Set Picture Control......... 112, 200
6
High ISO NR ..............................206
7
Color space ...............................205
8
Vignette control.......................207
9
Diffraction compensation .....207
10
Active D-Lighting ....................129
6
7
8
9
10
5
Copy the photographs.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a
JPEG copy of the selected photograph (if multiple photos are selected, a confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos). To exit without copying the photographs, press the K button.
328 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Trim
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.
• To reduce size of the crop : Tap W .
• To increase size of the crop : Tap X .
• To change the crop aspect ratio : Rotate the main command dial.
• To position the crop : Use the multi selector.
• To create a cropped copy : Press J to save the current crop as a separate file. The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left in the crop display.
D Viewing Cropped Copies
Depending on the dimensions of the cropped copy, playback zoom may not be available when the copy is displayed.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 329
Resize
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Use the Resize option in the camera menu N tab to create small copies of selected photographs.
1
Select Resize .
Highlight Resize in the N tab and press 2 .
2
Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2 .
Highlight the desired size and press J .
330 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3
Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image(s) and press
2 .
Highlight pictures and tap W to select or deselect (to view the highlighted picture full screen, touch and hold the X button). Selected pictures are marked by a 8 icon.
Press J when the selection is complete. Note that photographs taken at an image-area setting of 1 : 1 (16×16) or 16 : 9 (24×14) cannot be resized.
4
Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yes and press J to save the resized copies.
D Viewing Resized Copies
Depending on the dimensions of the resized copy, playback zoom may not be available when the resized copy is displayed.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 331
D-Lighting
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Before
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to save the retouched copy.
After
Quick Retouch
G button
➜ N (retouch menu)
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast. D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit subjects.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of enhancement. Press J to copy the photograph.
332 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
This option is used to correct “red-eye” and is available only with photographs taken using a flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and press J to create a copy.
Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
Straighten
G button
➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2 to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it counter-clockwise
(the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press J to save the retouched copy.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 333
Distortion Control
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select Manual to reduce distortion manually. Note that
Auto is not available with photos taken using the Auto distortion control option in the photo shooting menu or copies previously processed using Auto , and that distortion control cannot be performed again on copies created using Manual .
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pincushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the retouched copy.
334 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Perspective Control
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective in photos taken looking up from the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust perspective
(note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out). The results can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to save the retouched copy.
Before After
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 335
Image Overlay
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a new picture that is saved separately from the originals.
+
1
Select Image overlay .
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press 2 . Image overlay options will be displayed, with Image 1 highlighted; press J to display a picture selection dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
2
Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay. To view the highlighted photograph full frame, touch and hold the X button.
Press J to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display.
336 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3
Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1 . Highlight
Image 2 and press J , then select the second photo as described in Step 2.
4
Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to select the gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it.
The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
5
Preview the overlay.
To preview the composition, press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the
Preview column, then press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay and press J
(note that colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image). To save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save . To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, tap W .
6
Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting image will be displayed full-frame.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 337
D Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit-depth can be combined. The overlay is saved in JPEG fine format and has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1 . The current image comment is appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied.
338 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Trim Movie
G button ➜ N (retouch menu)
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed
(
Side-by-Side Comparison
(see below)
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option can only be accessed by pressing the i button and selecting Retouch when a copy or original is displayed.
1
Select a retouched copy (shown by a p icon) or an original that has been retouched.
2
Display retouch options.
Press i and select Retouch .
3
Select Side-by-side comparison .
Highlight Side-by-side comparison and press J .
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 339
4
Compare the copy with the original.
The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the right, with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display. Press 4 or 2 to switch between the source image and the retouched copy. To view the highlighted picture full frame, touch and hold the X button. If the copy was created from two source images using Image overlay , or if the source has been copied multiple times, press 1 or 3 to view the other images. To exit to playback, press the K button, or press J to exit to full-frame playback with the highlighted image displayed.
Options used to create copy
Source image Retouched copy
D Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that was protected or has since been deleted.
340 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
O
My Menu/
m
Recent Settings
To view My Menu, select the O tab in the camera menus.
The MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20 items from the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus. If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My
Menu.
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
Adding Options to My Menu
1
Select Add items .
In My Menu ( O ), highlight Add items and press 2 .
2
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing the option you wish to add and press 2 .
Menu Guide > O My Menu/ m Recent Settings 341
3
Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press J .
4
Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item up or down in My Menu. Press J to add the new item.
5
Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark.
Items indicated by a V icon cannot be selected. Repeat Steps 1–4 to select additional items.
342 Menu Guide > O My Menu/ m Recent Settings
Deleting Options from My Menu
1
Select Remove items .
In My Menu ( O ), highlight Remove items and press 2 .
2
Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to select or deselect. Selected items are indicated by a check mark.
3
Delete the selected items.
Press J . A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press J again to delete the selected items.
D Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the selected item from My Menu.
Menu Guide > O My Menu/ m Recent Settings 343
Reordering Options in My Menu
1
Select Rank items .
In My Menu ( O ), highlight Rank items and press 2 .
2
Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and press J .
3
Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and press J .
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition additional items.
4
Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to return to My
Menu.
344 Menu Guide > O My Menu/ m Recent Settings
Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select m RECENT SETTINGS for O MY MENU > Choose tab .
1
Select Choose tab .
In My Menu ( O ), highlight Choose tab and press 2 .
2
Select m RECENT SETTINGS .
Highlight m RECENT SETTINGS and press J . The name of the menu will change from “MY MENU” to “RECENT
SETTINGS.”
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O MY MENU for m RECENT SETTINGS > Choose tab .
D Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to delete the selected item.
Menu Guide > O My Menu/ m Recent Settings 345
Establishing Wireless Connections to
Computers or Smart Devices
Network Options
The types of network connection available with the camera are shown below.
Computer Smart Device
Access-point mode
Computer Wireless access point
Infrastructure mode
346 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You
Connect via Wi-Fi to upload selected pictures to a computer.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility
After configuring the camera for connection, you will need to pair it with the computer using the Wireless Transmitter Utility before you will be able to upload images via Wi-Fi. Once the devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the computer from the camera.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility is a computer application available for download from the Nikon Download Center: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com
Be sure to download the latest version after reading the release notes and system requirements.
A Illustrations
The appearance and content of the software and operating system dialogs, messages, and displays shown in this guide may vary with the operating system used. For information on basic computer operations, see the documentation provided with the computer or operating system.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 347
Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes
The camera can connect either via a wireless router on an existing network (infrastructure mode) or by direct wireless link
(access-point mode).
❚❚
Access-Point Mode
The camera and computer connect via direct wireless link, with the camera acting as a wireless LAN access point and without the need for
Access-point mode complicated adjustments to settings. Choose this option when working outdoors or in other situations in which the computer is not already connected to a wireless network. The computer cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera.
❚❚
Infrastructure Mode
The camera connects to a computer on an existing network (including home networks) via a wireless router.
The computer can still access
Infrastructure mode the Internet while connected to the camera.
D Infrastructure Mode
This guide assumes you are connecting via an existing wireless network. Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not supported.
348 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting in Access-Point Mode
Follow the steps below to create a direct wireless link to a computer in access-point mode.
1
Display network settings.
Select Connect to PC in the camera setup menu, then highlight Network settings and press 2 .
2
Select Create profile .
Highlight Create profile and press J .
3
Select Direct connection to PC .
Highlight Direct connection to PC and press J .
The camera SSID and encryption key will be displayed.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 349
4
Connect from the computer.
Windows : Click the wireless
LAN icon in the taskbar and select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3. When prompted to enter the network security key, enter the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3.
macOS/OS X : Click the wireless
LAN icon in the menu bar and select the SSID displayed by the camera in
Step 3. When prompted to supply a password, enter the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3.
5
Launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.
350 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
6
Select the camera.
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, select the camera name displayed in Step 5 and click Next .
7
Enter the authentication code.
The camera will display an authentication code.
Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter
Utility and click Next .
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 351
8
Complete the pairing process.
When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete, press
J .
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, click Next . You will be prompted to choose the destination folder; for more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter
Utility.
When you exit the Wireless Transmitter Utility after pairing is complete, a wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer.
9
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the network SSID will be displayed in green in the camera Connect to PC menu.
If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera via the wireless network list on your computer.
Now that a wireless connection has been established, you can upload images to the computer as described in“Uploading
Pictures” (
352 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
Follow the steps below to connect to a computer on an existing network in infrastructure mode.
1
Display network settings.
Select Connect to PC in the camera setup menu, then highlight Network settings and press 2 .
2
Select Create profile .
Highlight Create profile and press J .
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 353
3
Search for existing networks.
Highlight Search for Wi-Fi network and press J . The camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity and list them by name (SSID).
D “Easy Connect”
To connect without entering an SSID or encryption key, tap X in Step 3, then press J and choose from the following options:
• Push-button WPS : For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the camera J button to connect.
• PIN-entry WPS : The camera will display a PIN; to connect, use a computer to enter the PIN into the router (for more information, see the documentation provided with the router).
After connecting, proceed to Step 6.
354 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
4
Choose a network.
Highlight a network SSID and press J
(if the desired network is not displayed, tap X to search again).
Encrypted networks are indicated by a h icon; if the selected network is encrypted, you will be prompted to enter the encryption key as described in Step 5. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 6.
D Hidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the network list. If you highlight a blank entry and press J , you will be prompted to provide the network name; press J , enter a name, and then tap X . Tap X again to proceed to Step 5.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 355
5
Enter the encryption key.
When prompted to enter the encryption key for the wireless router, press J …
…and enter the key as described below. For information on the encryption key, see the documentation for the wireless router. Tap X when entry is complete.
Tap X again to initiate the connection.
The message shown in the illustration will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established.
356 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
6
Obtain or select an IP address.
Highlight one of the following options and press J .
• Obtain automatically : Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically.
• Enter manually : When prompted, enter an IP address by rotating the main command dial to highlight segments, pressing 4 and 2 to change and pressing J to accept. Tap X to exit to the “IP address configuration complete” dialog when entry is complete.
Tapping X again displays the sub-net mask, which you can edit by pressing 1 and 3 , pressing J to exit when entry is complete.
Confirm the IP address and press J to proceed.
7
Launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
When prompted, launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility on the computer.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 357
8
Select the camera.
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, select the camera name displayed in Step 7 and click Next .
9
Enter the authentication code.
The camera will display an authentication code.
Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter
Utility and click Next .
358 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
10
Complete the pairing process.
Press J when the camera displays the message shown in the illustration.
In the Wireless Transmitter
Utility, click Next . You will be prompted to choose the destination folder; for more information, see the Wireless
Transmitter Utility online help.
When you exit the Wireless Transmitter Utility after pairing is complete, a wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer.
11
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the network SSID will be displayed in green in the camera Connect to PC menu.
Now that a wireless connection has been established, you can upload images to the computer as described in “Uploading
Pictures” (
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 359
Uploading Pictures
You can select pictures for upload in the camera playback display or upload pictures as they are taken.
D Destination Folders
By default, images are uploaded to the following folders:
• Windows : \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility
• Mac : /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility
The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter
Utility. For more information, see the utility’s online help.
D Access Point Mode
Computers cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera in access point mode. To access the Internet, terminate the connection to the camera and then reconnect to a network with Internet access.
❚❚
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select pictures for upload.
1
Start playback.
Press the K button on the camera and select full-frame or thumbnail playback.
2
Press the i button.
Select a picture and press the i button to display the playback i menu.
360 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
3
Choose Select to send/deselect
(PC) .
Highlight Select to send/deselect
(PC) and press J . A white transfer icon will appear on the picture. If the camera is currently connected to a network, upload will begin immediately; otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is established. The transfer icon turns green during upload. Repeat Steps 2–3 to upload additional images.
D Deselecting Pictures
To remove transfer marking from the current picture, highlight Select to send/deselect (PC) and press J . To remove transfer marking from all pictures, select Connect to PC > Options > Deselect all?
in the setup menu.
❚❚
Uploading Photos as They Are Taken
To upload new photos as they are taken, select On for Connect to PC > Options >
Auto send . Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card; be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera. Movies and photographs taken in movie mode are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete but must instead be uploaded from the playback display.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 361
❚❚
The Transfer Icon
Upload status is indicated by the transfer icon.
• Y (white): Send . The picture has been selected for upload but upload has not yet begun.
• X (green): Sending . Upload in progress.
• Y (blue): Sent . Upload complete.
362 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
❚❚
The “Connect to PC” Status Display
The Connect to PC display shows the following information:
1 Status
2 Signal strength
3
Pictures/time remaining
3
1
2
The status of the connection to the host. The host name is displayed in green when a connection is established.
• While files are being transferred, the status display shows “Now sending” preceded by the name of the file being sent.
• Any errors that occur during transfer are also displayed here.
Wireless signal strength.
The estimated time required to send the remaining pictures.
D Loss of Signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost, but can be resumed by turning the camera off and then on again.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 363
Disconnecting and Reconnecting
The camera’s link to an existing network can be suspended or resumed as described below.
❚❚
Disconnecting
You can disconnect by turning the camera off, selecting Disable for Connect to PC > Wi-Fi connection in the setup menu, or selecting Wi-Fi connection > Close Wi-Fi connection in the i menu for shooting mode. The connection to the computer will also end if you use Wi-Fi to connect to a smart device.
D Access-Point Mode
A communication error will occur if the computer’s wireless connection is disabled before the camera’s. Disable camera Wi-Fi first.
❚❚
Reconnecting
To reconnect to an existing network, either:
• select Enable for Connect to PC > Wi-Fi connection in the setup menu, or
• choose Wi-Fi connection > Establish
Wi-Fi connection with PC in the i menu for shooting mode.
D Access-Point Mode
Enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting.
D Multiple Network Profiles
If the camera has profiles for more than one network, it will reconnect to the last network used. Other networks can be selected using the
Connect to PC > Network settings option in the setup menu.
364 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting to Smart Devices
To connect to the camera from a smartphone or tablet (below,
“smart device”), download the SnapBridge app.
The SnapBridge App
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera and smart devices.
The SnapBridge app is available free of charge from the Apple App Store® and on Google Play™. Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news.
What SnapBridge Can Do for You
Using the SnapBridge app, you can:
• Download pictures from the camera
Download existing pictures or download new pictures as they are taken.
• Control the camera remotely (remote photography)
Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device.
For details, see the SnapBridge app online help: https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 365
Wireless Connections
Using the SnapBridge app, you can connect via Wi-Fi (
Bluetooth (
0 373). Connecting the camera and smart device via
the SnapBridge app allows you to set the camera clock and update location data using information provided by the smart device.
Wi-Fi Bluetooth
366 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode)
Follow the steps below to connect to the camera via Wi-Fi.
D Before Connecting
Before connecting, enable Wi-Fi on the smart device (for details, see the documentation provided with the device), check that there is space available on the camera memory card, and ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
1
Smart device : Launch the SnapBridge app.
If this is the first time you have launched the app , tap Connect to camera and proceed to Step 2.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 367
If you have launched the app before , open the tab and tap
> Wi-Fi mode before proceeding to Step 3.
1 2
3
2
Smart device : Choose the camera and connection type.
When prompted to choose the camera type, tap mirrorless camera and then tap Wi-Fi connection .
2
1
368 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
3
Camera/Smart device : Turn the camera on.
The smart device will instruct you to ready the camera. Turn the camera on.
Do NOT tap Next until you have completed Step 4.
4
Camera : Enable Wi-Fi.
Select Connect to smart device >
Wi-Fi connection in the setup menu, then highlight Establish Wi-Fi connection and press J .
The camera SSID and password will be displayed.
D Enabling Wi-Fi
You can also enable Wi-Fi by selecting
Wi-Fi connection > Establish Wi-Fi conn. with smart device in the i menu for shooting mode.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 369
5
Smart device : Tap Next .
Tap Next once you have enabled Wi-Fi on the camera as described in the preceeding step.
6
Smart device : Tap View options .
After reading the instructions displayed by the smart device, tap
Open the device settings app .
• Android devices : Wi-Fi settings will be displayed.
• iOS devices : The “Settings” app will launch. Tap < Settings to open the
“Settings” app. Next, scroll up and tap Wi-Fi , which you’ll find near the top of the settings list.
370 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
7
Smart device : Enter the camera SSID and password.
Enter the SSID and password displayed by the camera in
Step 4.
Android device
(actual displays may differ) iOS device
(actual displays may differ)
You will not be required to enter the password when next you connect to the camera.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 371
8
Smart device : Return to the SnapBridge app.
After a Wi-Fi connection is established, Wi-Fi mode options will be displayed. See online help for information on using the SnapBridge app.
D Ending Wi-Fi Connections
To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap . When the icon changes to , tap and select
Exit Wi-Fi mode .
372 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting via Bluetooth
For information on pairing the camera and smart device when connecting for the first time, see “Connecting for the First Time:
Pairing”, below. For information on connecting once pairing is complete, see “Connecting to a Paired Device” (
❚❚
Connecting for the First Time: Pairing
Before connecting via Bluetooth for the first time, you will need to pair the camera and smart device as described below. See
“Android”, below, if you are using an Android device, or “iOS”
(
0 379) for information on pairing with iOS devices.
D Before Pairing
Before beginning pairing, enable Bluetooth on the smart device (for details, see the documentation provided with the device), check that there is space available on the camera memory card, and ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
Android
Follow the steps below to pair the camera with an Android device.
1
Camera : Ready the camera.
Select Connect to smart device >
Pairing (Bluetooth) in the setup menu, then highlight Start pairing and press J …
…to display the camera name.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 373
2
Android device : Launch the SnapBridge app.
If this is the first time you have launched the app , tap Connect to camera and proceed to Step 3.
If you have launched the app before , open the tab and tap Connect to camera .
374 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
3
Android device : Tap mirrorless camera to display connection options and then tap Pairing (Bluetooth) .
1 2
Note : This step will not be required the next time the devices are paired.
Note : You must enable location services when using
Bluetooth. Be sure to grant location access if prompted.
4
Android device : Choose the camera.
Tap the camera name.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 375
5
Camera/Android device : Check the authentication code.
Confirm that the camera and Android device display the same authentication code (circled in the illustration).
376 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
6
Camera/Android device : Initiate pairing.
Camera : Press J .
Android device : Tap the button indicated in the illustration (the label may differ depending on the version of Android you are using).
D Pairing Error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping the button on the Android device, pairing will fail and an error will be displayed.
• Camera : Press J and return to Step 1.
• Android device : Tap OK and return to Step 2.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 377
7
Camera/Android device : Follow the on-screen instructions.
Camera : Press J . The camera will display a message stating that the devices are connected.
Android device : Pairing is complete. Tap OK to exit to the tab.
D Pairing for the First Time
The first time you pair the Android device with a camera after installing the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto link (auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization) options. This prompt will not appear again, but auto link settings can be accessed at any time using Auto link in the tab.
Pairing is now complete. The next time you use the SnapBridge app, you can connect as described in “Connecting to a Paired
Device” (
D Ending Bluetooth Connections
To end the connection to the smart device, select Disable for Connect to smart device > Pairing (Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection in the camera setup menu.
378 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
iOS
Follow the steps below to pair the camera with an iOS device. For information on Android devices, see “Android” (
1
Camera : Ready the camera.
Select Connect to smart device >
Pairing (Bluetooth) in the setup menu, then highlight Start pairing and press J …
…to display the camera name.
2 iOS device : Launch the SnapBridge app.
If this is the first time you have launched the app , tap Connect to camera and proceed to Step 3.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 379
If you have launched the app before , open the tab and tap Connect to camera .
3 iOS device : Tap mirrorless camera to display connection options and then tap Pairing (Bluetooth) .
1
2
Note : This step will not be required the next time the devices are paired.
Note : You must enable location services when using
Bluetooth. Be sure to grant location access if prompted.
380 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
4 iOS device : Choose the camera.
Tap the camera name.
5 iOS device : Read the instructions.
Read the pairing instructions carefully and tap Understood .
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 381
6 iOS device : Select an accessory.
When prompted to select an accessory, tap the camera name again.
382 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
7
Camera/iOS device : Initiate pairing.
Camera : Press J .
iOS device : Tap the button indicated in the illustration (the label may differ depending on the version of iOS you are using).
D Pairing Error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping the button on the iOS device, pairing will fail and an error will be displayed.
• Camera : Press J and return to Step 1.
• iOS device : Dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that it is not running in the background, then open the iOS “Settings” app and request iOS to “forget” the camera as shown in the illustration before returning to Step 1.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 383
8
Camera/iOS device : Follow the on-screen instructions.
Camera : Press J . The camera will display a message stating that the devices are connected.
iOS device : Pairing is complete. Tap OK to exit to the tab.
D Pairing for the First Time
The first time you pair the iOS device with a camera after installing the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto link (auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization) options. This prompt will not appear again, but auto link settings can be accessed at any time using Auto link in the tab.
Pairing is now complete. The next time you use the SnapBridge app, you can connect as described in “Connecting to a Paired
Device” (
D Ending Bluetooth Connections
To end the connection to the smart device, select Disable for Connect to smart device > Pairing (Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection in the camera setup menu.
384 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
❚❚
Connecting to a Paired Device
Connecting to a smart device that has already been paired with the camera is quick and easy.
1
Camera : Enable Bluetooth.
In the setup menu, select Connect to smart device > Pairing
(Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection , then highlight Enable and press J .
2
Smart device : Launch the SnapBridge app.
A Bluetooth connection will be established automatically.
Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices 385
Troubleshooting
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Troubleshooting information for the SnapBridge app can be found in the app’s online help, which can be viewed at: https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility or
Camera Control Pro 2, see the online help for the application in question.
Problem
The camera displays a
TCP/IP error.
The camera displays a
“no memory card” error.
Upload is interrupted and fails to resume.
The connection is unreliable.
Solution
Check settings for the host computer or wireless router and adjust camera settings appropriately.
0
Confirm that the memory card is correctly inserted.
Upload will resume if the camera is turned off and then on again.
If Auto is selected for Channel , choose
Manual and select the channel manually.
If the camera is connected to a computer in infrastructure mode, check that the router is set to a channel between 1 and 8.
386 Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart Devices
Connecting to Other Devices
Expand your photographic horizons by connecting the camera to other devices via USB or HDMI.
Connecting to Computers Via USB
If the supplied USB cable is used to connect the camera to a computer running ViewNX-i, you can copy pictures to the computer, where they can be viewed, edited, and organized. For information on establishing wireless connections to computers, see “Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi” (
“Establishing Wireless Connections to Computers or Smart
Devices”.
Connecting to Other Devices 387
Installing ViewNX-i
Download the ViewNX-i installer from the following website and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation
(existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier versions may not support the camera). An Internet connection is required. For system requirements and other information, see the Nikon website for your region.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
D Capture NX-D
Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.
Capture NX-D is available for download from: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
388 Connecting to Other Devices
Copying Pictures to the Computer
For detailed instructions, see the online help for ViewNX-i.
1
Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
D Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged.
D Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
Connecting to Other Devices 389
2
Turn the camera on.
The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i will start (if a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2). If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, launch ViewNX-i and click the “Import” icon.
D Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below.
1 Under Import pictures and videos , click Change program . A program selection dialog will be displayed; select Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK .
2 Double-click .
D Windows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay prompt when the camera is connected. Tap or click the dialog and then tap or click
Nikon Transfer 2 to select
Nikon Transfer 2.
D macOS/OS X
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes with macOS or OS X) and select
Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the camera is detected.
390 Connecting to Other Devices
3
Click Start Transfer .
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
Click Start Transfer
D Transferring Movies
Do not attempt to transfer movies from the memory card while it is inserted in another camera. Doing so could result in the movies being deleted without being transferred.
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.
4
Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.
Connecting to Other Devices 391
Connecting to Printers
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer connected directly to the camera using the supplied USB cable.
When connecting the cable, do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
When the camera and printer are turned on, a welcome screen will be displayed, followed by a PictBridge playback display.
D Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) cannot be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.
D Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection, set Color space to sRGB .
D USB Hubs
Operation is not guaranteed if the camera and printer are connected via a USB hub.
D See Also
See “Error Messages“ (
0 414) for information on what to do if an error
occurs during printing.
392 Connecting to Other Devices
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1
Display the desired picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Tap the X button to zoom in on the current frame (press K to exit zoom). To view six pictures at a time, tap the W button. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or tap the X button to display the highlighted picture full frame.
2
Adjust printing options.
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default option, select Printer default ). After selecting an option, press J to return to the printer settings menu.
• Page size : Choose a page size.
• No. of copies : This option is listed only when pictures are printed one at a time. Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies (maximum 99).
• Border : Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.
• Print date : Choose whether to print the dates of recording on photos.
• Cropping : This option is listed only when pictures are printed one at a time. To exit without cropping, highlight No cropping and press J . To crop the current picture, highlight Crop and press 2 . A crop selection dialog will be displayed; tap X to increase the size of the crop, W to decrease, and use the multi selector to position the crop.
Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.
Connecting to Other Devices 393
3
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel printing before all copies have been printed, press J .
Printing Multiple Pictures
1
Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.
2
Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2 .
• Print select : Select pictures for printing. Press 4 or 2 to scroll through pictures (to view the highlighted picture full screen, touch and hold the X button) and press 1 or 3 to choose the number of prints. To deselect a picture, set the number of prints to zero.
• Index print : Create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card. Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.
A warning will be displayed if the page size selected in
Step 3 is too small for an index print.
3
Adjust printing options.
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 of “Printing
Pictures One at a Time” ( 0 393).
4
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel printing before all copies have been printed, press J .
394 Connecting to Other Devices
Connecting to HDMI Devices
The camera can be connected to high-definition video devices using a third-party HDMI cable (type D). Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
Connect to camera
Connect to high-definition device
(choose cable with connector for
HDMI device)
❚❚
Connecting to HDMI TVs
After connecting the camera to an HDMI television or other display, tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the camera on and press the K button. During playback, images will be displayed on the television screen. Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls cannot be used.
Connecting to Other Devices 395
Connecting to Other HDMI Devices
Use the HDMI option in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output.
• Output Resolution : Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If
Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select the appropriate format.
• Output range : Auto is recommended in most situations. If the camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the HDMI device, you can choose Limited range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 16 to
235 or Full range for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to 255. Choose Limited range if you notice a loss of detail in shadows, Full range if shadows are “washed out” or too bright.
D HDMI Output
HDMI output is not available while movies are being recorded at movie frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion or when the camera is connected to a computer running
Camera Control Pro 2.
396 Connecting to Other Devices
On-Camera Flash Photography
“On-Camera” Versus “Remote”
You can take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe or one or more remote flash units.
Camera-Mounted Flash Units
Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera as described in “Using an
On-Camera Flash” (
Remote Flash Photography
Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash control
(Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL) as described in “Remote Flash
On-Camera Flash Photography 397
Using an On-Camera Flash
Follow the steps below to mount an optional flash unit on the camera and take photographs using the flash.
1
Mount the unit on the accessory shoe.
See the manual provided with the unit for details.
2
Turn on the camera and flash unit.
The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator ( c ) will be displayed when charging is complete.
3
Adjust flash settings.
Choose the flash control mode ( 0 400) and flash mode
4
Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
5
Take pictures.
398 On-Camera Flash Photography
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
D i-TTL Flash Control
When an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting
System is mounted on the camera and set to TTL, it will operate in i-TTL mode, employing monitor preflashes for flash photography using i-TTL balanced fill-flash and the like. i-TTL flash control is not available with flash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting System.
D Studio Strobe Lighting
Rear-curtain sync cannot be used with large studio strobe lighting units, as they will not sync correctly.
On-Camera Flash Photography 399
Flash Control Mode
When an SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash unit is mounted on the camera, the
Flash control mode (built-in) option displayed when Flash control is selected in the photo shooting menu is replaced by Flash control mode (external) .
In modes P , S , A , and M , this option can be used to choose the flash control mode and adjust the flash level and other flash settings. Settings for other flash units can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
• TTL : Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.
• Manual : Choose the flash level ( Manual output amount ) manually.
400 On-Camera Flash Photography
Remote Flash Photography
About Remote Flash Photography
The camera can be used with one or more remote flash units
(Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “On-
Camera Flash Photography” (
Throughout this chapter, operations involving an accessory connected to the camera are indicated by C , operations involving remote flash units by f . For more information on f , see the manual provided with the flash unit.
Remote Flash Photography 401
Controlling Remote Flash Units
Remote flash units can be controlled via optical signals from an optional flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe and functioning as a master flash (optical AWL).
For information on compatible flash units, see
“The Nikon Creative Lighting System” ( 0 426). If the flash unit in
question is an SB-500, settings can be adjusted from the camera
(see below); otherwise settings must be adjusted using flash unit controls as described in the documentation provided with the unit. For information on flash placement and other topics, see the documentation provided with the flash units. The built-in flash unit cannot be used as a master flash.
Using the SB-500
When an optional SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the camera accessory shoe,
Wireless flash options will appear under Flash control in the photo shooting menu. Selecting Optical AWL in the Wireless flash options menu enables group flash photography.
1
C : Select Group flash options .
Highlight Group flash options in the flash control display and press 2 .
402 Remote Flash Photography
2
C : Adjust settings for the master flash.
Choose the flash control mode and flash level for the master flash and the flash units in each group:
• TTL : i-TTL flash control
• q A : Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units)
• M : Choose the flash level manually
• – – (off) : The units do not fire and the flash level cannot be adjusted
Set the master flash to channel 3.
3 f : Set the remote flash units to channel 3.
4 f : Group the remote flash units.
Choose a group (A or B) for each remote flash unit. Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used, the practical maximum is three per group. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance.
Remote Flash Photography 403
5
C / f : Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information. After arranging the units, press the test button on the master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the units are functioning normally.
6
C / f : Take the photograph.
Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit.
D Note: Remote Flash Photography
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is not mounted on a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units ( q A mode), as this may interfere with exposure. To prevent low-intensity timing flashes emitted by the master flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high fnumbers). After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the results in the camera display.
404 Remote Flash Photography
Troubleshooting
Before Contacting Customer Support
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by following the steps below. Check this list before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
S TEP
1
Check the common problems listed in the following sections:
• “Problems and Solutions” (
•
“Indicators and Error Messages” ( 0 412)
S TEP
2
Turn the camera off and remove the battery. After waiting for about a minute, re-insert the battery and turn the camera on.
D If you have just finished shooting, wait at least a minute before removing the battery, as the camera may still be writing data to the memory card.
S TEP
3
Search Nikon websites.
For support information and answers to frequently asked questions, visit the website for your country or region (
To download the latest firmware for your camera, visit: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com
S TEP
4
Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
D Restoring Default Settings
Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features may be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or features that are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings using the Reset all settings
item in the setup menu ( 0 322). Note,
however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information, and other user-generated entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
Troubleshooting 405
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond : Wait for recording to end. If the problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery. Note that although any data currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be affected by removing the battery.
The camera takes time to turn off : The camera is performing an image sensor check. Do not remove the battery until the camera has turned off.
The viewfinder or monitor does not turn on :
• Choose a different monitor mode using the monitor mode button.
• Dust, lint, or other foreign matter on the eye sensor may prevent it functioning normally. Clean the eye sensor with a blower.
The viewfinder is out of focus : Rotate the diopter adjustment control to focus the viewfinder. If this does not correct the problem, select AF-S , singlepoint AF, and the center focus point, and then frame a high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder.
The displays turn off without warning : Choose longer delays for Custom
Setting c3 ( Power off delay ).
Shooting
The camera takes time to turn on : Delete files or folders.
The shutter-release is disabled :
• The memory card is full.
• The memory card is write-protected (“locked”).
• Mode S selected after Bulb or Time is chosen for shutter speed in mode M .
• Release locked is selected for Slot empty release lock in the setup menu and no memory card is inserted.
406 Troubleshooting
The camera is slow to respond to the shutter-release button : Select Off for Custom
Setting d3 ( Exposure delay mode ).
Only one shot is taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release modes :
• Turn HDR off.
• If the built-in flash is used with continuous low-speed or continuous high-speed selected for release mode, only one picture will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. Selecting continuous high-speed (extended) enables burst photography and disables the built-in flash.
Photos are out of focus : To focus using autofocus, select AF-A , AF-S , AF-C , or AF-F
for focus mode. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus ( 0 53),
use manual focus or focus lock.
Beeps do not sound if:
• Off is selected for Beep options > Beep on/off in the setup menu.
• AF-C is selected for focus mode or AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C .
• On is selected for Silent photography in the photo shooting menu.
• The camera is in movie mode.
The full range of shutter speeds is not available : A flash in use. Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 ( Flash sync speed ); when using compatible flash units, choose 1/200 s (Auto FP) to access the full range of shutter speeds.
Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway : When AF-C is selected for focus mode or AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C , focus can be locked by pressing the A ( L ) button.
The focus point cannot be changed : Focus-point selection is unavailable in auto-area AF; choose another AF-area mode.
The camera is slow to record photos : Turn long exposure noise reduction off.
Photographs and movies do not appear to have the same exposure as the preview shown in the display : To preview the effects of changes to settings that affect exposure and color, select On for Custom Setting d7 ( Apply settings to live view ). Note that changes to Monitor brightness and
Viewfinder brightness have no effect on images recorded with the camera.
Troubleshooting 407
Flicker or banding appears in movie mode : Select Flicker reduction in the movie shooting menu and choose an option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply.
Bright regions or bands appear in the view through the lens : The shot is being framed under flashing sign, flash, or other light source with brief duration.
Smudges appear in photographs : Clean the front and rear lens elements. If the problem persists, clean the image sensor as described in “Cleaning the
Image Sensor” (
0 438) or consult a Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Bokeh is irregular : With fast shutter speeds and/or fast lenses, you may notice irregularities in how bokeh is shaped. The effect can be mitigated by choosing slower shutter speeds and/or higher f-numbers.
Shooting ends unexpectedly or does not start : Shooting may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if the ambient temperature is high or the camera has been used extensively for burst shooting, movie recording, or the like. If you are unable to shoot because the camera has overheated, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
Image artifacts appear in the display during shooting : “Noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on the view through the lens. Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may also arise as a result of increases in the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits during shooting; turn the camera off when it is not in use. At high ISO sensitivities, noise may become more noticeable in long exposures or in pictures recorded when the camera temperature is elevated. Note that the distribution of noise in the display may differ from that in the final picture. To reduce noise, adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed, or Active
D-Lighting.
408 Troubleshooting
The camera cannot measure white balance : The subject is too dark or too bright.
Images cannot be selected as source for preset white balance : The images in question were created with a different model of camera.
White balance bracketing is unavailable :
• An NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option is selected for image quality.
• Multiple exposure or HDR (high dynamic range) photography is on.
The effects of Picture Controls differ from image to image : Auto is selected for Set
Picture Control , a Picture Control based on Auto is selected, or A (auto) is selected for Quick sharp , contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of photographs, choose another setting.
Metering cannot be changed : Autoexposure lock is in effect.
Exposure compensation cannot be used : In mode M , exposure compensation affects only the display in the exposure indicator; shutter speed and aperture are not affected.
Noise (colored splotches or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures : Enable long exposure noise reduction.
The AF-assist illuminator does not light :
• Select On for Custom Setting a8 ( Built-in AF-assist illuminator ).
• The illuminator does not light in movie mode.
• The illuminator does not light in the following focus modes: AF-C
(including when AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C ) and MF .
Sound is not recorded with movies :
• Microphone off is selected for Microphone sensitivity in the movie shooting menu.
• Manual is selected for Microphone sensitivity in the movie shooting menu and a low value is selected.
Troubleshooting 409
Playback
NEF (RAW) images are not played back : The pictures were taken at image qualities of NEF + JPEG.
The camera does not display pictures recorded with other cameras : Pictures recorded with other makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback : Select All for Playback folder .
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation :
• Select On for Rotate tall in the playback menu.
• The photos are displayed in image review.
• The camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken.
Pictures cannot be deleted:
• The memory card is write-protected (“locked”).
• The pictures are protected.
Pictures cannot be retouched : The picture cannot be edited with this camera.
The camera displays a message stating that the folder contains no images : Select All for Playback folder .
Pictures cannot be printed : NEF (RAW) photos cannot be printed by direct
USB connection. Transfer the photos to a computer and print them using
Capture NX-D. NEF (RAW) photos can be saved in JPEG format using the
NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu.
Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices : Confirm that an HDMI cable
(available separately) is connected.
Output to HDMI devices does not function as expected :
• Check that the HDMI cable is correctly connected.
• Check again after selecting Reset all settings in the setup menu.
Computers do not display NEF (RAW) images the same way as the camera does : Thirdparty software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active
D-Lighting, vignette control, or the like. Use Capture NX-D or ViewNX-i.
Pictures cannot be transferred to a computer : The computer operating system is not compatible with the camera or image transfer software. Use a card reader or card slot to copy the pictures to a computer.
410 Troubleshooting
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name) :
• Confirm that Disable is selected for Airplane mode in the camera setup menu.
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Connect to smart device > Pairing
(Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection in the camera setup menu.
• Confirm that Wi-Fi has been enabled using the Connect to smart device > Wi-Fi connection option in the setup menu.
• Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
The camera cannot connect to wireless printers and other wireless devices : This camera can connect only to computers and smart devices.
Miscellaneous
The date of recording is not correct : The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate timepieces and reset as necessary.
Some menu items cannot be selected : Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted.
The camera does not respond to the ML-L7 remote control :
• The optional ML-L7 remote control has not established a connection to the camera. Press the power button on the remote control. If L does not appear in the camera shooting display, pair the camera with the remote control again.
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Wireless remote (ML-L7) options > Wireless remote connection in the setup menu.
• In the setup menu, confirm that: Disable is selected for Airplane mode , Disable is selected for Connect to smart device > Pairing
(Bluetooth) > Bluetooth connection , and Disable is selected for
Connect to PC > Wi-Fi connection .
The camera cannot be paired with the ML-L7 remote control : Confirm that Disable is selected for Airplane mode in the setup menu.
Troubleshooting 411
Indicators and Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the camera display.
Indicators
The following indicators appear in the camera display:
Indicator Problem
H
H
(flashes)
F––
Low battery.
Battery exhausted.
Battery info unavailable.
Battery not supported.
Battery temperature high.
Lens is not correctly attached.
Solution
Ready a fully-charged spare battery.
Recharge or replace battery.
Battery cannot be used.
Contact Nikon-authorized service representative.
Remove battery and wait for it to cool.
Ensure that the lens is correctly attached and that retractable lenses are extended. This indicator is also displayed when a non-CPU lens is attached via a mount adapter, but in this case no action need be taken.
Bulb
(flashes)
Time
(flashes)
Bulb selected in mode S .
Time selected in mode S .
Change shutter speed or select mode M .
412 Troubleshooting
Indicator c
(flashes)
(Exposure indicators and shutter speed or aperture display flash)
Full
(flashes)
Err
(flashes)
Problem
Built-in or optional flash has fired full power; photo may be underexposed.
Solution
Check photo in display; if underexposed, adjust settings and try again.
Subjects appear dark and underexposed.
Use built-in or optional flash.
• Decrease ISO sensitivity.
• Use optional ND filter. In mode:
Subject too bright; photo will be overexposed.
S Increase shutter speed
A Choose a smaller aperture
(higher f-number)
• 4 Choose another shooting mode
• Increase ISO sensitivity.
Subject too dark; photo will be underexposed.
• Use built-in or optional flash.
In mode:
S Lower shutter speed
A Choose larger aperture
(lower f-number)
Memory insufficient to record further pictures at current settings, or camera has run out of file or folder numbers.
Camera malfunction.
• Reduce quality or size.
• Delete pictures after copying important images to computer or other device.
• Insert new memory card.
Release shutter. If error persists or appears frequently, consult
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Troubleshooting 413
Error Messages
The following error messages may appear in the camera display:
Message
No memory card.
Problem
Camera cannot detect memory card.
Solution
Turn camera off and confirm that card is correctly inserted.
Cannot access this memory card.
Insert another card.
Error accessing memory card.
• Use Nikon-approved card.
• If error persists after card has been repeatedly ejected and reinserted, card may be damaged. Contact retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Unable to create new folder.
Delete files or insert new memory card after copying important pictures to computer or other device.
Memory card is locked.
Slide lock to “write” position.
This card is not formatted.
Format the card.
The memory card is write-protected
(“locked”).
Memory card has not been formatted for use in camera.
Slide the lock switch to the
“write” position (
Format memory card or insert new memory card.
Recording interrupted.
Please wait.
Memory card does not support required movie write speed.
Use card that supports required write speed or change option selected for
Frame size/frame rate in movie shooting menu.
Unable to start live view. Please wait.
The camera is too hot. It cannot be used until it cools.
Please wait. Camera will turn itself off.
The internal temperature of the camera is high.
Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming shooting.
414 Troubleshooting
Message
Folder contains no images.
Cannot display this file.
Cannot select this file.
This movie cannot be edited.
Check printer.
Check paper.
Paper jam.
Out of paper.
Check ink supply.
Out of ink.
Problem
No viewable pictures on memory card.
Solution
Insert memory card containing viewable pictures.
No viewable pictures in folder(s) selected for playback.
Use Playback folder item in playback menu to select folder containing viewable pictures.
File was edited on computer or does not comply with DCF standards, or file is corrupt.
File cannot be viewed on camera.
Selected picture cannot be retouched.
Selected movie cannot be edited.
Pictures created with other devices cannot be retouched.
• Movies created with other devices cannot be edited.
• Movies must be at least two seconds long.
Printer error.
Paper in printer is not of selected size.
Paper is jammed in printer.
Printer is out of paper.
Check printer. To resume, select Continue (if available) * .
Insert paper of correct size and select Continue * .
Clear jam and select
Continue * .
Insert paper of selected size and select Continue * .
Ink error.
Printer is out of ink.
Check ink. To resume, select
Continue * .
Replace ink and select
Continue * .
* See printer manual for more information.
Troubleshooting 415
Technical Notes
Compatible Lenses
The camera can be used with all Z mount lenses.
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR
Confirm that the lens name includes “NIKKOR Z”.
A Compatible F Mount Lenses
F mount lenses can be mounted on Z mount cameras using an FTZ mount adapter.
• Some features may not be available depending on the lens used.
Information on the F mount lenses that can be used with Z mount cameras and on any restrictions that may apply can be found in
Compatible F Mount Lenses , available from the Nikon Download Center: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/491/FTZ.html
416 Technical Notes
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
The Camera Display
Refer to this section for information on the indicators in the camera display (monitor and viewfinder). For illustrative purposes, the displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Monitor: Photo Mode
The following indicators appear in the monitor in photo mode.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
1
Shooting mode ............................. 71
2
Flexible program indicator ......... 72
3
User setting mode ........................ 78
4
AF-area brackets ........................... 54
5
Flash mode...................................104
6
Interval timer indicator .............235
“Clock not set” indicator ............. 39
“No memory card”
indicator ..................................32, 35
7
Release mode .............................. 131
8
Focus point...............................42, 54
9
Focus mode...................51, 212, 258
10
AF-area mode...............54, 212, 258
11
Active D-Lighting ..... 129, 205, 256
12
Picture Control .......... 112, 200, 256
13 Bluetooth connection
indicator...................................... 314
Airplane mode ............................ 313
Technical Notes 417
14
White balance .....63, 116, 194, 255
15
Image size............................ 124, 190
16
Image quality ..................... 122, 190
17 i
icon.......................................16, 24
18 Exposure bracketing
indicator...................................... 214
WB bracketing indicator ........... 218
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 221
HDR indicator .............................. 230
Multiple exposure indicator..... 223
19 Number of shots remaining in exposure bracketing
sequence..................................... 214
Number of shots remaining in white balance bracketing
sequence..................................... 218
Number of shots remaining in
ADL bracketing sequence....... 221
HDR exposure differential ........ 230
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure) .................................... 223
20
Exposure indicator ........................75
Exposure compensation
display ............................................98
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure bracketing............ 214
21
Flash-ready indicator................. 429
22 “k” (appears when memory remains for over 1000
exposures) .....................................34
23 Number of exposures
remaining .............................34, 457
24
Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 128
Remote-control connection
indicator...................................... 319
25
ISO sensitivity.................................96
26
ISO sensitivity indicator ...............96
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .....97
27 Exposure compensation
indicator.........................................98
28
Flash compensation indicator.... 107
29
Aperture ..........................................73
30
Subject tracking.............................58
31
Shutter speed.......................... 72, 74
32
FV lock indicator ......................... 108
33
Metering..................... 127, 208, 258
34
Focus indicator...............................61
35
Battery indicator............................34
36
Flicker detection ......................... 208
37
Shutter type................................. 275
Silent photography..............67, 252
38
Exposure delay mode................ 274
39
Autoexposure (AE) lock.... 100, 101
40
Optical VR indicator .......... 135, 212
41
Touch shooting ....................... 12, 59
42
Live view preview indicator..... 277
43
Temperature warning ............... 419
418 Technical Notes
D Temperature Warnings
If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning will be displayed together with a count-down timer (the timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached). In some cases, the timer may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned on. When the timer reaches zero, the shooting display will turn off automatically to protect the camera’s internal circuits.
Technical Notes 419
❚❚
The Information Display
1 2 3 4 5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
Shooting mode ..............................71
2
Flexible program indicator..........72
3
User setting mode.........................78
4
Shutter speed ..........................72, 74
5
Aperture...........................................73
6 Exposure bracketing
indicator...................................... 214
WB bracketing indicator ........... 218
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 221
HDR indicator .............................. 230
Multiple exposure indicator..... 223
7 “k” (appears when memory remains for over 1000
exposures) .....................................34
8 Number of exposures
remaining .............................34, 457
9
Exposure indicator ........................75
Exposure compensation
display ............................................98
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure bracketing............ 214
WB bracketing....................... 218
ADL bracketing ..................... 221
10 i
icon ...................................... 16, 24
11
ISO sensitivity.................................96
12
ISO sensitivity indicator ...............96
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .....97
13
FV lock indicator ......................... 108
14
Autoexposure (AE) lock.... 100, 101
15
Flash compensation indicator.... 107
16 Exposure compensation
indicator.........................................98
Exposure compensation
value ...............................................98
6
7
8
9
420 Technical Notes
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
38
37
36
35
26
27
28
34
33
32
29
30
31
17 Bluetooth connection
indicator ......................................314
Airplane mode.............................313
18
Wi-Fi connection indicator .......128
Remote-control connection
indicator ......................................319
19 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator ......................................206
20
Shutter type .................................275
Silent photography ............. 67, 252
21
Exposure delay mode ................274
22
Interval timer indicator .............235
“Clock not set” indicator ............. 39
23
Flash control mode.....................209
24
“Beep” indicator ..........................312
25
Battery indicator ........................... 34
26
Built-in Wi-Fi ................................ 128
27
Release mode .............................. 131
28
AF-area mode...............54, 212, 258
29
Focus mode...................51, 212, 258
30
Optical VR ............................ 135, 212
31
Active D-Lighting ..... 129, 205, 256
32
Metering ..................... 127, 208, 258
33
Image size............................ 124, 190
34
White balance......63, 116, 194, 255
35
Picture Control .......... 112, 200, 256
36
Image quality ..................... 122, 190
37
Flash mode................................... 104
38
Temperature warning................ 419
Technical Notes 421
The Monitor: Movie Mode
The following indicators appear in the monitor in movie mode.
1 2
10
3
4
9
8
7
6
5
1
Recording indicator ......................44
“No movie” indicator ....................45
2 Frame size and rate/image
quality................................. 139, 254
3
Time remaining..............................44
4
File name ...................................... 254
5 Release mode
(still photography).................... 258
6
Sound level .................................. 141
7
Microphone sensitivity .... 141, 259
8
Frequency response .................. 260
9
Electronic VR indicator..... 143, 259
10
Wind noise reduction................ 260
422 Technical Notes
The Viewfinder: Photo Mode
The following indicators appear in the viewfinder in photo mode.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
41
40
39
13
14
38
37
36
35
34 33
32
31
30
29 28 27 25
26 24
23 22
21
20
1
Battery indicator ........................... 34
2
Live view preview indicator .....277
3
Optical VR indicator ..........135, 212
4
Flash mode ...................................104
5
Release mode ..............................131
6
Focus mode.................. 51, 212, 258
7
AF-area mode .............. 54, 212, 258
8 Active D-Lighting
indicator ....................129, 205, 256
9 Picture Control
indicator ....................112, 200, 256
10
White balance..... 63, 116, 194, 255
11
Image quality ..................... 122, 190
12
Image size............................ 124, 190
13 Bluetooth connection
indicator...................................... 314
Airplane mode ............................ 313
14
Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 128
Remote-control connection
indicator...................................... 319
15
Focus point...............................42, 54
16
Flicker detection ......................... 208
17
Subject tracking............................ 58
15
16
17
18
19
Technical Notes 423
18
Exposure bracketing indicator ... 214
WB bracketing indicator ........... 218
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 221
HDR indicator .............................. 230
Multiple exposure indicator..... 223
19 Number of shots remaining in exposure bracketing
sequence..................................... 214
Number of shots remaining in white balance bracketing
sequence..................................... 218
Number of shots remaining in
ADL bracketing sequence....... 221
HDR exposure differential ........ 230
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure) .................................... 223
20
Flash-ready indicator................. 429
21 “k” (appears when memory remains for over
1000 exposures)...........................34
22 Number of exposures
remaining .............................34, 457
23
ISO sensitivity .................................96
24
ISO sensitivity indicator ...............96
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator......97
25 Exposure compensation
indicator.........................................98
26
Flash compensation indicator.... 107
27
Exposure indicator ........................75
Exposure compensation
display ............................................98
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure bracketing............ 214
28
Aperture ..........................................73
29
Shutter speed.......................... 72, 74
30
Autoexposure (AE) lock.... 100, 101
31
User setting mode.........................78
32
Flexible program indicator..........72
33
Shooting mode..............................71
34
Metering..................... 127, 208, 258
35
Focus indicator...............................61
36
FV lock indicator ......................... 108
37
Exposure delay mode................ 274
38
Shutter type................................. 275
Silent photography..............67, 252
39
Interval timer indicator............. 235
“Clock not set” indicator..............39
“No memory card”
indicator.................................. 32, 35
40
AF-area brackets............................54
41
Temperature warning ............... 419
424 Technical Notes
The Viewfinder: Movie Mode
The following indicators appear in the viewfinder in movie mode.
1
10
2
3
9
8
7
6
4
5
1 Frame size and rate/image
quality.................................139, 254
2
File name ......................................189
3
Recording indicator...................... 44
“No movie” indicator.................... 45
4
Time remaining ............................. 44
5 Release mode
(still photography).................... 258
6
Sound level .................................. 141
7
Microphone sensitivity..... 141, 259
8
Frequency response................... 260
9
Wind noise reduction ................ 260
10
Electronic VR indicator ..... 143, 259
Technical Notes 425
The Nikon Creative Lighting System
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography.
CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units: i-TTL balanced fill flash 1 i-TTL
Standard i-TTL fill flash q A Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
GN
Distance-priority manual
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
✔ ✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
2
✔
2
✔
—
✔
✔
3
3
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
2
✔
— —
✔ ✔
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
✔
— — — — — —
✔ ✔ ✔
4 — —
✔
4
✔
4
— — — — — — —
426 Technical Notes
Remote flash control i-TTL i-TTL
[A:B]
Quick wireless flash control q A Auto aperture
A
M
RPT i-TTL
Non-TTL auto
Manual
Repeating flash i-TTL
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
[A:B]
Quick wireless flash control q A/A
Auto aperture/
Non-TTL auto
✔
✔
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless
Lighting
Color information communication
(flash)
✔
✔
—
✔
Color information communication
(LED light)
Auto FP High-Speed Sync
FV lock 8
Red-eye reduction
7
Camera modeling illumination
—
✔
✔
✔
—
Unified flash control —
Camera flash unit firmware update
✔
6
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
6
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
9
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
4
4
✔
— — —
— — — —
✔
— —
✔
5 — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
✔
—
✔
4 — — — —
— — — — — — —
✔ ✔ ✔
—
✔
— —
✔ ✔ ✔
—
✔
— —
— — — — — — —
✔ ✔ ✔
—
✔
— —
✔ ✔ ✔
— — — —
— — — — — — —
✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔ ✔
— —
✔
— — — —
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔
— —
✔
—
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
✔
—
✔
— — —
✔
Technical Notes 427
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3 q A / A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings.
4 Can only be selected using the camera Flash control option.
5 Available only during close-up photography.
6 Choice of q A and A depends on the option selected with the master flash.
7 Available only in i-TTL , q A , A , GN , and M flash-control modes.
8 Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when the flash is set to emit monitor pre-flashes in q A or A flash control mode.
9 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
D Flash Compensation
In i-TTL and auto aperture ( q A ) flash control modes, the flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit or the camera
Flash control option is added to the flash compensation selected with the Flash compensation option in the photo shooting menu.
428 Technical Notes
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. Note that this camera is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator ( c ) flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash units only).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test shot and view the results in the camera display.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.
In mode P , the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
100
4
200
5
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
400
5.6
800
7.1
1600
8
3200
10
6400
11
12800
13
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
AF-assist illumination is provided by the camera, not the flash unit; the
SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400 do, however, provide red-eye reduction.
Noise in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken with an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached directly to the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance between the camera and the power pack.
Technical Notes 429
D Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes.
Flash unit SB-80DX,
SB-28DX, SB-28,
SB-26, SB-25,
SB-50DX, SB-23,
SB-29, SB-21B,
SB-30, SB-27 1 ,
SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-20, SB-16B,
Flash mode
A
M
G
REAR
Non-TTL auto
Manual
Repeating flash
Rear-curtain sync 2
SB-24
✔
✔
✔
✔
SB-29S
—
✔
—
✔
SB-15
✔
✔
—
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A
(non-TTL auto flash).
2 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
D FV Lock
The area metered for FV lock is as follows:
Flash unit
Stand-alone flash unit
Used with other flash units
(Advanced Wireless Lighting)
Flash mode i-TTL q A i-TTL q A
A
Metered area
6-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure meter
Entire frame
Area metered by flash exposure meter
A Studio Strobe Lighting
To adjust the color and brightness of the view through the lens so that shots are easier to frame, select Off for Custom Setting d7 ( Apply settings to live view ).
430 Technical Notes
Other Accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
Power sources • EN-EL25 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery : Additional EN-EL25 batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives.
• MH-32 Battery Charger : The MH-32 can be used to recharge
EN-EL25 batteries.
• EH-73P Charging AC Adapter : The EH-73P can be used to charge EN-EL25 batteries inserted in the camera (the battery only charges when the camera is off ).
Filters
USB cables
Hot shoe adapters
Accessory shoe covers
Body caps
• Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, avoid using filters when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended if matrix metering fails to produce the desired results for filters with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8,
ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for details.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus or the in-focus indicator ( I ).
UC-E21 USB cable : A USB cable with a Micro-B connector for connection to the camera and a type A connector for connection to the USB device.
AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter : Mount the AS-15 on the camera hot shoe to connect studio strobe lights or other flash equipment via a sync terminal.
BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover : A cover protecting the accessory shoe when no flash unit is attached.
BF-N1 Body Cap : The body cap prevents dust entering the camera when a lens is not in place.
Technical Notes 431
Viewfinder eyepiece accessories
DK-30 Rubber Eyecup : The DK-30 makes the image in the viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
Mount adapters
Remove Replace
FTZ Mount Adapter : An adapter that allows NIKKOR F mount lenses to be used with digital cameras that support interchangeable Z mount lenses. The picture angle is equivalent to that of a lens with a 35 mm formatequivalent focal length approximately 1.5 times longer.
• For information on attaching, removing, maintaining, and using FTZ mount adapters, refer to the mount adapter manual.
Microphones • ME-1 Stereo Microphone : Connect the ME-1 to the camera microphone jack to record stereo sound and reduce the chance of picking up equipment noise (such as the sounds produced by the lens during autofocus).
• ME-W1 Wireless Microphone : Use this wireless Bluetooth microphone for off-camera recording.
432 Technical Notes
Remote controls
ML-L7 Remote Control : Once paired with the camera, the
ML-L7 can be used to take photographs and record movies remotely.
• Use the Wireless remote (ML-L7) options > Save wireless remote controller option in the camera setup menu to pair the camera with the remote.
• The camera can be paired with only one remote at a time. If paired successively with more than one remote, the camera will respond only to the remote with which it was last paired.
• To reactivate the camera after the standby timer has expired and the monitor and viewfinder displays have turned off, turn the remote control on and press and hold the remote-control shutter-release or movierecord button.
• For more information, see the remote control manual or the section on the setup menu Wireless remote
(ML-L7) options item in the “Menu Guide” chapter of the Reference Manual .
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest information.
Charging AC Adapters
When inserted in the camera, EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion batteries will charge while the camera is connected to an optional EH-73P charging AC adapter. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about 3 hours and 30 minutes. Note that in countries or regions where required, charging AC adapters are supplied with a plug adapter attached; the shape of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale.
1
Insert the EN-EL25 into the camera
(
Technical Notes 433
2
After confirming that the camera is off, connect the charging AC adapter using the USB cable supplied with the camera and plug the adapter in. Use only a UC-E21 USB cable and an EH-73P charging adapter; do not use other charging adapters or third-party USB-AC adapters or smartphone chargers. Insert the plug or plug adapter straight into the socket rather than at an angle, and observe the same precaution when unplugging the charging AC adapter.
Charge lamp
Outlet
EH-73P charging
AC adapter
The camera charge lamp lights amber while charging is in progress and turns off when charging is complete. Note that although the camera can be used while connected, the battery will not charge and the camera will not draw power from the charging AC adapter while the camera is on.
3
Unplug and disconnect the charging AC adapter when charging is complete.
434 Technical Notes
D The Charge Lamp
If the battery cannot be charged using the charging AC adapter, for example because the battery is not compatible or the temperature of the camera is elevated, the charge lamp will flash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then turn off. If the charge lamp is off and you did not observe the battery charging, turn the camera on and check the battery level.
Technical Notes 435
Software
The following Nikon software can be used with the camera:
Computer software
Smartphone
(tablet) apps
• Camera Control Pro 2 (available for purchase) : Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk.
• ViewNX-i * : More than a tool for viewing and editing photos and movies shot with Nikon digital cameras,
ViewNX-i can be used in combination with other Nikon imaging applications to help you get the most from your pictures. It also offers smooth access to online services.
• Capture NX-D : Fine-tune photos shot in Nikon’s unique
NEF/NRW (RAW) formats or convert them to JPEG or
TIFF (NEF/RAW processing). Capture NX-D can be used not only with NEF/NRW (RAW) pictures but also with
JPEG and TIFF photos shot with Nikon digital cameras for such tasks as editing tone curves and enhancing brightness and contrast.
• Wireless Transmitter Utility : The Wireless Transmitter Utility is required if the camera is to be connected to a network. Pair the camera with the computer and download pictures via Wi-Fi.
• Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center.
Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the latest version.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
* Existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier versions may not support the camera.
SnapBridge : Download photos and movies from the camera to your smart device via a wireless connection.
• The SnapBridge app is available from the Apple App
Store® and on Google Play™.
• Visit our website for the latest information on the
SnapBridge app.
436 Technical Notes
Caring for the Camera
Learn how to store, clean, and care for your camera.
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%,
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as televisions or radios, or
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
• Camera body : Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important :
Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.
• Lenses, viewfinder : Glass surfaces are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
• Monitor : Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.
Technical Notes 437
Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere to the image sensor and affect your photographs. The image sensor can be cleaned as described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and easily damaged; we recommend that manual cleaning be performed only by a Nikon-authorized service representative.
1
Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens or body cap.
2
Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls on the image sensor, examine the sensor for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 4.
3
Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage the sensor. Dirt that cannot be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the sensor.
4
Replace the lens or body cap.
438 Technical Notes
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the camera itself ) may adhere to the image sensor, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, and body cap. Avoid attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, clean the sensor manually (
0 438) or have the sensor cleaned by authorized
Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
Technical Notes 439
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Do not drop : The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
Keep dry : This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature : Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields : Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the display, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun : Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs.
Lasers and other bright light sources : Do not direct lasers or other extremely bright light sources toward the lens, as this could damage the camera’s image sensor.
Turn the product off before removing the battery : Do not remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry.
440 Technical Notes
Cleaning : When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
Lenses, viewfinders, and other glass elements are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other stains from glass surfaces, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the glass carefully.
Do not touch the image sensor : Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the image sensor, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch or otherwise damage the sensor. For information on cleaning the image sensor, see
“Cleaning the Image Sensor” ( 0 438).
Image sensor
Lens contacts : Keep the lens contacts clean and be careful not to touch them with your fingers or with tools or other objects.
Storage : To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If the product will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away.
Technical Notes 441
Notes on the monitor and viewfinder : These displays are constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light. Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
Should you feel unwell or experience any of the following symptoms while framing shots in the viewfinder, discontinue use until your condition improves: nausea, eye pain, eye fatigue, dizziness, headache, stiffness in your neck or shoulders, carsickness, or loss of hand-eye coordination. The same applies should you start to feel unwell when watching the shooting display flicker rapidly on and off during burst photography.
Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that include bright lights or back-lit subjects.
The battery and charger : Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries and chargers:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• The battery may become hot while in use. Observe caution when handling the battery immediately after use.
442 Technical Notes
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the camera for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before charging.
• Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C to 35 °C
(41 °F to 95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C
(32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F). The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above
60 °C (140 °F).
• If the charge lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
• Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again.
Technical Notes 443
• Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new battery.
• Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.
• Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
• Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being sure to first insulate the terminals with tape.
• Do not use chargers with damage that leaves the interior exposed or that produce unusual sounds when used.
The charging AC adapter : Observe the precautions below when using the charging AC adapter.
• Do not move the camera during charging. Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the camera showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged.
Disconnect and reconnect the adapter to begin charging again.
• Do not short the adapter terminals. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the adapter.
• Unplug the adapter when it is not in use.
• Do not use adapters with damage that leaves the interior exposed or that produce unusual sounds when used.
444 Technical Notes
Specifications
Nikon Z 50 Digital Camera
Type
Type Digital camera with support for interchangeable lenses
Nikon Z mount Lens mount
Lens
Compatible lenses • Z mount NIKKOR lenses
• F mount NIKKOR lenses with mount adapter; restrictions may apply
Effective pixels
Effective pixels 20.9 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
23.5 × 15.7 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon DX format)
21.51 million
Dust-Reduction System Image Dust Off reference data (requires
Capture NX-D)
Storage
Image size (pixels) • DX (24×16) image area
5568 × 3712 (Large: 20.7 M)
4176 × 2784 (Medium: 11.6 M)
2784 × 1856 (Small: 5.2 M)
• 1 : 1 (16×16) image area
3712 × 3712 (Large: 13.8 M)
2784 × 2784 (Medium: 7.8 M)
1856 × 1856 (Small: 3.4 M)
• 16 : 9 (24×14) image area
5568 × 3128 (Large: 17.4 M)
4176 × 2344 (Medium: 9.8 M)
2784 × 1560 (Small: 4.3 M)
• Photographs taken during movie recording at a frame size of 3840 × 2160 : 3840 × 2160
• Photographs taken during movie recording at a frame size of 1920 × 1080 : 1920 × 1080
Technical Notes 445
Storage
File format
Picture Control System
Media
File system
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
• NEF (RAW) : 12 or 14 bit
• JPEG : JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine
(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG : Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome,
Portrait, Landscape, Flat, Creative Picture
Controls (Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday,
Somber, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached,
Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red,
Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon); selected Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards
DCF 2.0, Exif 2.31, PictBridge
Frame coverage
Magnification
Eyepoint
Diopter adjustment
Eye sensor
0.99-cm/0.39-in. approx. 2360k-dot (XGA) OLED electronic viewfinder with color balance and auto and 7-level manual brightness controls
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
Approx. 1.02× (50 mm lens at infinity, −1.0 m −1 )
19.5 mm (−1.0 m −1 ; from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens)
−3 – +3 m −1
Automatically switches between monitor and viewfinder displays
Monitor
Monitor 8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 1040k-dot tilting TFT touch-sensitive LCD with 170° viewing angle, approximately 100% frame coverage, and 11level manual brightness controls
446 Technical Notes
Shutter
Type
Speed
Flash sync speed
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focalplane mechanical shutter; electronic frontcurtain shutter; electronic shutter
1 /
4000
– 30 s (choose from step sizes of 1 /
3
and
1 /
2
EV), bulb, time
X= 1 /
200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1 /
200 s or slower; Auto FP High-Speed sync supported
Release
Release mode
Approximate maximum frame advance rate
(measured under Nikonspecified test conditions)
Self-timer
Single frame, low-speed continuous, highspeed continuous, high-speed continuous
(extended), self-timer
•
•
•
Low-speed continuous
High-speed continuous
: 1–4 fps
: 5 fps
High-speed continuous (extended) : 11 fps
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of
0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s
Exposure
Metering system
Metering mode
Range (ISO 100, f/2.0 lens,
20 °C/68 °F)
TTL metering using camera image sensor
• Matrix metering
• Center-weighted metering : Weight of 75% given to 8 mm circle in center of frame; weighting can instead be based on average of entire frame
• Spot metering : Meters 3.5 mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on selected focus point
• Highlight-weighted metering
–4 – +17 EV
Technical Notes 447
Exposure
Mode • b : Auto, P : programmed auto with flexible program, S : shutter-priority auto, A : aperturepriority auto, M : manual
• Scene modes : k portrait; l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up; o night portrait; r night landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow; d sunset; e dusk/dawn; f pet portrait; g candlelight; j blossom; z autumn colors;
0 food
• Special effect modes : 4 night vision; V super vivid; T pop; U photo illustration; 5 toy camera effect; 6 miniature effect; 7 selective color; 1 silhouette; 2 high key; 3 low key
• U1 and U2 : user settings
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV (choose from step sizes of 1 /
3
and
Exposure lock
1 /
2
EV) available in P , S , A , M , h , and q modes
Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure
Index)
ISO 100 – 51200 (choose from step sizes of 1 /
3 and 1 /
2
EV); can also be set to approx. 1 or 2 EV
(ISO 204800 equivalent) above ISO 51200; auto
ISO sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting
Multiple exposure
Other options
Can be selected from Auto , Extra high , High ,
Normal , Low , or Off
Add, average, lighten, darken
HDR (high dynamic range), photo mode flicker reduction
Focus
Autofocus
Detection range (singleservo AF, photo mode, ISO
100, f/2.0 lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
Hybrid phase-detection/contrast AF with AF assist
−4 – +19 EV
• Without low-light AF : −2 – +19 EV
448 Technical Notes
Focus
Lens servo
Focus points (single-point
AF, photo mode, DX image area)
AF-area mode
• Autofocus (AF) : Single-servo AF ( AF-S ); continuous-servo AF ( AF-C ); AF mode autoswitch ( AF-A ; available only in photo mode); full-time AF ( AF-F ; available only in movie mode); predictive focus tracking
• Manual focus (M) : Electronic rangefinder can be used
209
Focus lock
Pinpoint, single-point, and dynamic-area AF
(pinpoint and dynamic-area AF available in photo mode only); wide-area AF (S); wide-area
AF (L); auto-area AF
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing
A ( L ) button
Flash
Built-in flash
Charging time
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Manual pop-up flash raised via flash pop-up control
Guide Number : Approx. 7/22, 7/22 with manual flash (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Approx. 3 s
TTL : i-TTL flash control; i-TTL balanced fill-flash is used with matrix, center-weighted, and highlight-weighted metering, standard i-TTL fill-flash with spot metering
Fill flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync + red-eye, rear-curtain sync, auto, auto + red-eye reduction, auto slow sync, auto slow sync + red-eye, flash off
–3 – +1 EV (choose from step sizes of 1 /
3
and
1 /
2
EV) available in P , S , A , M , and h modes
Technical Notes 449
Flash
Flash-ready indicator
Accessory shoe
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes as underexposure warning after flash is fired at full output
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock i-TTL flash control, optical Advanced Wireless
Lighting, FV lock, Color Information
Communication, Auto FP High-Speed Sync
White balance
White balance Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct sunlight, cloudy, shade, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), flash, choose color temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), preset manual
(up to 6 values can be stored), all except choose color temperature with fine-tuning
Bracketing
Bracketing types
Movie
Metering system
Metering mode
Frame size (pixels) and frame rate
Exposure, white balance, and ADL
TTL metering using camera image sensor
Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
• 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p (progressive), 25p,
24p
• 1920 × 1080; 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
• 1920×1080 (slow-motion); 30p ×4, 25p ×4,
24p ×5
Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p,
25p, and 24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97,
25, and 23.976 fps respectively; quality selection available except at sizes of
3840 × 2160, 1920 × 1080 120p/100p, and
1920 × 1080 slow-motion, in which case quality is fixed at m (high)
450 Technical Notes
Movie
File format
Video compression
MOV, MP4
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio recording format Linear PCM, AAC
Audio recording device Built-in stereo or external microphone with attenuator option; sensitivity adjustable
Exposure compensation –3 – +3 EV (choose from step sizes of 1 /
3
and
1 /
2
EV) available in P , S , A , M , h , and q modes
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure
Index)
• M : Manual selection (ISO 100 to 25600; choose from step sizes of 1 /
3
and 1 /
2
EV); auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to 25600) available
Active D-Lighting
Other options with selectable upper limit
• P, S, A : Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to
25600) with selectable upper limit
• b , h , q (excluding 4 ) : Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to 25600)
• 4 : Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100 to Hi 4)
Can be selected from Same as photo settings ,
Extra high , High , Normal , Low , or Off
Time-lapse movies, electronic vibration reduction
Playback
Playback Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images) playback with playback zoom, playback zoom cropping, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide shows, histogram display, highlights, photo information, location data display, auto image rotation, and picture rating
Interface
USB
HDMI output
Audio input
Hi-Speed USB with Micro-B connector; connection to built-in USB port is recommended
Type D HDMI connector
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in power supported)
Technical Notes 451
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Range (line of sight)
• Standards :
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, Oceania, and the following European countries: Albania,
Armenia, Georgia, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova, and
Tajikistan)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (other European countries, Uzbekistan, U.S.A., Canada,
Mexico)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the
Americas)
• Operating frequency :
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) (Africa, Asia,
Oceania, and the following European countries: Albania, Armenia, Georgia,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova, and Tajikistan)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5320 MHz (other European countries,
Uzbekistan)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5825 MHz (U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–
5805 MHz (other countries in the Americas)
• Maximum output power (EIRP) :
2.4 GHz band: 6.9 dBm
5 GHz band: 10.2 dBm
• Authentication : Open system, WPA2-PSK
• Communication protocols : Bluetooth Specification
Version 4.2
• Operating frequency :
Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
• Maximum output power (EIRP) :
Bluetooth: 1.4 dBm
Bluetooth Low Energy: –0.1 dBm
Approximately 10 m (32 ft) without interference; range may vary with signal strength and presence or absence of obstacles
452 Technical Notes
Power source
Battery
Charging AC adapter
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
One EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion battery
EH-73P charging AC adapter
1 /
4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 126.5 × 93.5 × 60 mm (5 × 3.7 × 2.4 in.)
Weight Approx. 450 g (15.9 oz.) with battery and memory card but without body cap; approx. 395 g/14 oz. (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature
Humidity
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
85% or less (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with C amera and
I maging P roducts A ssociation (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and illustrations in the manuals are for expository purposes only.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Technical Notes 453
❚❚
MH-32 Battery Charger
Rated input
Rated output
Supported batteries
Charging time
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.21 A
DC 8.4 V/1.12 A (MAX)
Nikon EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Approx. 2 hours and 30 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 67 × 94 × 28 mm (2.7 × 3.8 × 1.2 in.), excluding plug adapter
Weight Approx. 99 g (3.5 oz), excluding plug adapter
The symbols on this product represent the following: m AC, p DC, q Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
❚❚
EN-EL25 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Type
Rated capacity
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.6 V/1120 mAh
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 34 × 50.5 × 18 mm (1.4 × 2.0 × 0.8 in.)
Weight Approx. 53 g (1.9 oz), excluding terminal cover
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
454 Technical Notes
A Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data.
Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the Reset all settings option in the camera setup menu to delete network settings and other personal information.
A Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0
: The D esign Rule for C amera F ile System (DCF) is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.
• Exif version 2.31
: The camera supports Exif ( Ex changeable I mage F ile
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge : A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI : H ighD efinition M ultimedia I nterface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMIcompliant devices via a single cable connection.
Technical Notes 455
Approved Memory Cards
The camera supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, including SDHC and SDXC cards compliant with UHS-I. Cards rated UHS Speed Class 3 or better are recommended for movie recording and playback; using slower cards may result in recording or playback being interrupted. When choosing cards for use in card readers, be sure they are compatible with the device. Contact the manufacturer for information on features, operation, and limitations on use.
456 Technical Notes
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 32 GB SanDisk SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP card at different image quality and size settings when DX (24 × 16) is selected for Choose image area (as of April 2019).
Image quality Image size File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 1, 2
12-bit 19.9 MB 846 35
—
14-bit 24.7 MB 743 30
Fine
Normal
Basic
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
9.2 MB
6.3 MB
3.5 MB
5.5 MB
3.3 MB
1.8 MB
2.3 MB
1.6 MB
1.0 MB
2100
3400
6200
4100
6600
11,800
8000
12,600
21,600
71
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1 All figures are approximate. File size, and with it the buffer capacity and number of images that can be recorded, varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. May drop if auto distortion control is on.
Technical Notes 457
Battery Endurance
The approximate length of footage or number of shots that can be recorded with a fully-charged EN-EL25 battery varies with the monitor mode.
1 The figures for photographs 2 are as follows:
• Viewfinder only : 280 shots
• Monitor only : 320 shots
The figures for movies 3 are:
• Viewfinder only : 75 minutes
• Monitor only : 75 minutes
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance:
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features
• Using the camera with optional accessories connected
• Repeatedly zooming in and out
• Taking pictures at low ambient temperatures
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL25 batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused.
1 Endurance varies with the condition of the battery, the temperature, the interval between shots, and the length of time menus are displayed.
2 CIPA standard. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–
6.3 VR lens under the following test conditions: one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s.
3 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and a NIKKOR Z DX
16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR lens under conditions specified by the C amera and I maging P roducts
A ssociation (CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 29 minutes 59 seconds in length; recording may end before these limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.
458 Technical Notes
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens
User’s Manual
This section is included as a lens manual for purchasers of the
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR lens kit. Note that lens kits may not be available in some countries or regions.
Using the Lens
❚❚
Parts of the Lens: Names and Functions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
Note : The rear cap included with the lens that comes with the lens kit may differ from that shown, in which case it can be removed without performing Step q .
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 459
1 Lens hood*
2 Zoom ring
Lens hoods block stray light that would otherwise cause flare or ghosting. They also serve to protect the lens.
Rotate to zoom in or out. Be sure to extend the lens before use.
3 Focal length scale Determine the approximate focal length when
4 Focal length mark zooming the lens in or out.
5 Control ring
Autofocus mode selected :
In autofocus mode, rotate the ring to adjust a setting such as Focus (M/A) or Aperture assigned using the camera. For more information, see the description of Custom control assignment / Custom controls
(shooting) in the camera manual.
Manual focus mode selected :
Rotate the ring to focus.
6 Lens mounting mark Use when mounting the lens on the camera.
7 CPU contacts Used to transfer data to and from the camera.
8 Front lens cap
9 Rear lens cap
—
—
* Available separately.
460 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚
Attachment and Removal
Attaching the Lens
1
Turn the camera off, remove the body cap, and detach the rear lens cap.
2
Position the lens on the camera body, keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body, and then rotate the lens counterclockwise until it clicks into place.
Removing the Lens
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise.
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 461
❚❚
Before Use
The lens is retractable and must be extended before use. Rotate the zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into the extended position. Pictures can only be taken when the focal length mark points to positions between 16 and 50 on the focal length scale.
Pictures can be taken at these focal lengths
To retract the lens, rotate the zoom ring in the opposite direction, stopping when you reach the ( I ) position on the focal length scale.
If the camera is turned on with the lens retracted, a warning will be displayed. Extend the lens before use.
462 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚
Attaching and Removing Optional Lens Hoods
Lens hoods (available separately) screw directly into the threads in front of the lens. Do not touch the glass surface of the lens or use excessive force.
To remove the hood, unscrew it from the lens.
❚❚
Using Built-in Flash Units
• Shadows will be visible in photos where the light from the built-in flash is obscured by the lens or lens hood. Remove the lens hood before shooting. Note, however, that even if the hood is removed, shadows may still be visible at some focal lengths and subject distances.
• The focal lengths at which built-in flash units can be used vary with the camera; see the camera manual for details. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject at focal lengths shorter than those specified.
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 463
❚❚
Vibration Reduction (VR)
The lens’s on-board vibration reduction can be enabled or disabled using camera controls; see the camera manual for details. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.5 stops slower than would otherwise be the case and increasing the range of shutter speeds available.
Note : The effects of VR on shutter speed are measured according to Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards.
DX-format lenses are measured using a DX-format camera with on-camera VR set to Normal . Zoom lenses are measured at maximum zoom.
464 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚
When the Lens Is Attached
• The focus position may change if you turn the camera off and then on again after focusing. If you have focused on a preselected location while waiting for your subject to appear, we recommend that you do not turn the camera off until the picture is taken.
• Mounting this lens on an FX-format camera:
- selects the DX image area, reducing the available focus points and number of pixels recorded, and
- disables the Image Dust Off ref photo option in the setup menu.
• Movies shot with the lens mounted on a Z 6 and 1920 × 1080
120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu will be recorded at the following frame sizes and rates:
- 1920 × 1080; 120p
- 1920 × 1080; 100p
V 1920 × 1080; 60p
V 1920 × 1080; 50p
- 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 30p
- 1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 25p
- 1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 24p
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 465
Precautions for Use
• Do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the lens hood.
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Due to the design of the vibration reduction system, the lens may rattle when shaken. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• Replace the front and rear lens caps when the lens is not in use.
• To protect the interior of the lens, store it out of direct sunlight.
• Do not leave the lens in humid locations or in locations in which it may be exposed to moisture. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
• Do not leave the lens next to open flames or in other extremely hot locations. Extreme heat could damage or warp exterior parts made from reinforced plastic.
• Rapid changes in temperature may cause damaging condensation inside and outside the lens. Before taking the lens from a warm to a cold environment or vice versa, place it in a bag or plastic case to slow the change in temperature.
• We recommend that you place the lens in a case (available separately) to protect it from scratches during transport.
466 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
Lens Care
• Removing dust is normally sufficient to clean the glass surfaces of the lens.
• Smudges, fingerprints, and other oily stains can be removed from the lens surface using a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens cleaning tissue lightly dampened with a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner. Wipe gently from the center outwards in a circular motion, taking care not to leave smears or touch the lens with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens.
• Neutral Color (NC) filters (available separately) and the like can be used to protect the front lens element.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
Accessories
❚❚
Supplied Accessories
• LC-46B 46 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap
• LF-N1 Rear Lens Cap (a different cap may be supplied with lens kits)
❚❚
Compatible Accessories
• CL-C4 Lens Case
• HN-40 Screw-on Lens Hood
• 46 mm screw-on filters
D Filters
• Use only one filter at a time.
• Remove the lens hood before attaching filters.
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 467
Specifications
Mount
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Focusing system
Vibration reduction
Minimum focus distance
(measured from focal plane)
Nikon Z mount
16 – 50 mm f/3.5 – 6.3
9 elements in 7 groups (including 1 ED element and 4 aspherical elements)
83°–31° 30' (DX image area)
Graduated in millimeters (16, 24, 35, 50)
Internal focusing system
Lens shift using v oice c oil m otors (VCMs)
• 16 mm zoom position: 0.25 m (0.82 ft)
• 24 mm zoom position: 0.2 m (0.66 ft)
• 35 mm zoom position: 0.23 m (0.76 ft)
• 50 mm zoom position: 0.3 m (0.99 ft)
0.2× Maximum reproduction ratio
Diaphragm blades
Aperture range
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
• 16 mm zoom position: f/3.5 – 22
• 50 mm zoom position: f/6.3 – 40
46 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Approx. 70 mm/2.8 in. maximum diameter ×
32 mm/1.3 in.
(distance from camera lens mount flange when lens is retracted)
Approx. 135 g (4.8 oz) Weight
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance, specifications, and performance of this product at any time and without prior notice.
468 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens
User’s Manual
This section is included as a lens manual for purchasers of the
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR lens kit. Note that lens kits may not be available in some countries or regions.
Using the Lens
❚❚
Parts of the Lens: Names and Functions
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3
11 12
Note : The rear cap included with the lens that comes with the lens kit may differ from that shown, in which case it can be removed without performing Step q .
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 469
1 Lens hood*
Lens hoods block stray light that would otherwise cause flare or ghosting. They also serve to protect the lens.
2 Lens hood lock mark
3
Lens hood alignment mark Use when attaching the lens hood.
4
Lens hood mounting mark
5 Zoom ring
Rotate to zoom in or out. Be sure to extend the lens before use.
6 Focal length scale Determine the approximate focal length when
7 Focal length mark zooming the lens in or out.
8 Control ring
Autofocus mode selected :
In autofocus mode, rotate the ring to adjust a setting such as Focus (M/A) or Aperture assigned using the camera. For more information, see the description of Custom control assignment / Custom controls
(shooting) in the camera manual.
Manual focus mode selected :
Rotate the ring to focus.
9 Lens mounting mark Use when mounting the lens on the camera.
10 CPU contacts Used to transfer data to and from the camera.
11 Front lens cap
12 Rear lens cap
—
—
* Available separately.
470 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚
Attachment and Removal
Attaching the Lens
1
Turn the camera off, remove the body cap, and detach the rear lens cap.
2
Position the lens on the camera body, keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body, and then rotate the lens counterclockwise until it clicks into place.
Removing the Lens
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise.
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 471
❚❚
Before Use
The lens is retractable and must be extended before use. Rotate the zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into the extended position. Pictures can only be taken when the focal length mark points to positions between 50 and 250 on the focal length scale.
Pictures can be taken at these focal lengths
To retract the lens, rotate the zoom ring in the opposite direction, stopping when you reach the ( I ) position on the focal length scale.
If the camera is turned on with the lens retracted, a warning will be displayed. Extend the lens before use.
472 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚
Attaching and Removing Optional Lens Hoods
Align the lens hood mounting mark with the lens hood alignment mark ( q ) and then rotate the hood ( w ) until the mounting mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark ( e ).
To remove the hood, reverse the above steps.
Lens hood alignment mark
Lens hood mounting mark Lens hood lock mark
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the lens hood alignment mark ( I ) and avoid gripping the front of the hood too tightly. The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 473
❚❚
Using Built-in Flash Units
Shadows will be visible in photos where the light from the builtin flash is obscured by the lens or lens hood. Remove the lens hood before shooting. Note, however, that even if the hood is removed, shadows may still be visible at some focal lengths and subject distances.
Shadow Shadow
❚❚
Vibration Reduction (VR)
The lens’s on-board vibration reduction can be enabled or disabled using camera controls; see the camera manual for details. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 5.0 stops slower than would otherwise be the case and increasing the range of shutter speeds available.
Note : The effects of VR on shutter speed are measured according to Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards.
DX-format lenses are measured using a DX-format camera with on-camera VR set to Normal . Zoom lenses are measured at maximum zoom.
474 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚
When the Lens Is Attached
• The focus position may change if you turn the camera off and then on again after focusing. If you have focused on a preselected location while waiting for your subject to appear, we recommend that you do not turn the camera off until the picture is taken.
• Mounting this lens on an FX-format camera:
- selects the DX image area, reducing the available focus points and number of pixels recorded, and
- disables the Image Dust Off ref photo option in the setup menu.
• Movies shot with the lens mounted on a Z 6 and 1920 × 1080
120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion selected for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu will be recorded at the following frame sizes and rates:
- 1920 × 1080; 120p
- 1920 × 1080; 100p
V 1920 × 1080; 60p
V 1920 × 1080; 50p
- 1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 30p
- 1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 25p
- 1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion) V 1920 × 1080; 24p
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 475
Precautions for Use
• Do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the lens hood.
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Due to the design of the vibration reduction system, the lens may rattle when shaken. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• Replace the front and rear lens caps when the lens is not in use.
• To protect the interior of the lens, store it out of direct sunlight.
• Do not leave the lens in humid locations or in locations in which it may be exposed to moisture. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
• Do not leave the lens next to open flames or in other extremely hot locations. Extreme heat could damage or warp exterior parts made from reinforced plastic.
• Rapid changes in temperature may cause damaging condensation inside and outside the lens. Before taking the lens from a warm to a cold environment or vice versa, place it in a bag or plastic case to slow the change in temperature.
• We recommend that you place the lens in a case (available separately) to protect it from scratches during transport.
476 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
Lens Care
• Removing dust is normally sufficient to clean the glass surfaces of the lens.
• Smudges, fingerprints, and other oily stains can be removed from the lens surface using a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens cleaning tissue lightly dampened with a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner. Wipe gently from the center outwards in a circular motion, taking care not to leave smears or touch the lens with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens.
• Neutral Color (NC) filters (available separately) and the like can be used to protect the front lens element.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
Accessories
❚❚
Supplied Accessories
• LC-62B 62 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap
• LF-N1 Rear Lens Cap (a different cap may be supplied with lens kits)
❚❚
Compatible Accessories
• CL-C1 Lens Case
• HB-90A Bayonet Hood
• 62 mm screw-on filters
D Filters
• Use only one filter at a time.
• Remove the lens hood before attaching filters or rotating circular polarizing filters.
Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual 477
Specifications
Mount
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Focusing system
Vibration reduction
Minimum focus distance
(measured from focal plane)
Nikon Z mount
50 – 250 mm f/4.5 – 6.3
16 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED element)
31° 30’–6° 30’ (DX image area)
Graduated in millimeters (50, 70, 100, 135, 200,
250)
Internal focusing system
Lens shift using v oice c oil m otors (VCMs)
• 50 mm zoom position: 0.5 m (1.64 ft)
• 70 mm zoom position: 0.52 m (1.71 ft)
• 100 mm zoom position: 0.58 m (1.91 ft)
• 135 mm zoom position: 0.65 m (2.14 ft)
• 200 mm zoom position: 0.83 m (2.73 ft)
• 250 mm zoom position: 1.0 m (3.29 ft)
0.23× Maximum reproduction ratio
Diaphragm blades
Aperture range
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
• 50 mm zoom position: f/4.5 – 22
• 250 mm zoom position: f/6.3 – 32
62 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Approx. 74 mm/3 in. maximum diameter ×
110 mm/4.4 in.
(distance from camera lens mount flange when lens is retracted)
Approx. 405 g (14.3 oz) Weight
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance, specifications, and performance of this product at any time and without prior notice.
478 Technical Notes
➜
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR Lens User’s Manual
Lenses That May Block the Built-in Flash and AF-Assist Illuminator
The lenses listed in this section may block the built-in flash or
AF-assist illuminator under some conditions.
AF-Assist Illumination
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 1.0–3.0 m (3 ft
4 in.–9 ft 10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 16–300 mm. Some lenses may block the illuminator at certain focus distances.
• Remove lens hoods when using the illuminator.
• The following lenses interfere with AF-assist illumination:
Lenses that prevent the use of AF-assist illumination for autofocus
NIKKOR Z 14–30mm f/4 S
Lenses that limit the range at which AF-assist illumination can be used for autofocus
NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/2.8 S AF-assist illumination cannot be used for autofocus at distances under 2.5 m (8 ft 3 in.)
Technical Notes 479
The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of
16–300 mm, although in some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to shadows cast by the lens.
• Peripheral illumination may drop at focal lengths under
16 mm.
• The NIKKOR Z 14–30mm f/4 S casts shadows in photos taken with the built-in flash at all focal lengths. Other lenses that restrict use of the built-in flash are as follows:
Lens
NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR
NIKKOR Z 24–70mm f/2.8 S
NIKKOR Z DX 50–250mm f/4.5–6.3 VR
Minimum shadow-free focal length/ minimum shadow-free focus distance
16 mm/0.6 m (2 ft)
24–50 mm/No vignetting
70 mm/1 m (3 ft 4 in.)
50 mm/1 m (3 ft 4 in.)
70 mm/0.8 m (2 ft 8 in.)
100–250 mm/No vignetting
D Red-Eye Reduction
Lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction.
A More on the Built-in Flash
• The built-in flash has a minimum range of about 0.6 m (2 ft).
• Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
Note : Shadows appear in photographs when the lens blocks the light from the flash.
480 Technical Notes
Shadow Shadow
Trademarks and Licenses
A Trademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license. Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Mac, macOS, OS X, Apple®,
App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, and iPod touch® are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google
LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or modified from work created and shared by Google and used according to terms described in the Creative
Commons 3.0 Attribution License. PictBridge is a trademark of the
Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). The SD, SDHC, and
SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and
High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Nikon Corporation is under license.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect wireless performance.
Technical Notes 481
A FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
( https://www.freetype.org
). All rights reserved.
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project
( https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz ). All rights reserved.
A AVC Patent Portfolio License
T HIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO ”) AND / OR (ii) DECODE AVC
VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON -
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND / OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO
PROVIDE AVC VIDEO . N O LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER
USE . A DDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. S EE https://www.mpegla.com
482 Technical Notes
A Unicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character Database)
This software incorporates Unicode® Character Database open-source code. The license for this open-source code is given below.
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991-2019 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html
.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation
(the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that either
(a) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the
Data Files or Software, or
(b) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated
Documentation.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED
IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE
OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Technical Notes 483
Index
Symbols b
(Auto mode) .............................40, 44
P
(Programmed auto) .................71, 72
S
(Shutter-priority auto) ............. 71, 72
A
(Aperture-priority auto)..........71, 73
M
(Manual) ...................................... 71, 74
U1 / U2
..................................................71, 78
h
(Scene).....................................71, 80
k
(Portrait) ............................................81
l
(Landscape)......................................81
p
(Child).................................................81
m
(Sports)...............................................82
n
(Close up) ..........................................82
o
(Night portrait)................................82
r
(Night landscape)...........................83
s
(Party/indoor) ..................................83
t
(Beach/snow)...................................83
d
(Sunset)..............................................84
e
(Dusk/dawn) ....................................84
f
(Pet portrait) ....................................84
g
(Candlelight)......................................85
j
(Blossom)...........................................85
z
(Autumn colors) ..............................85
0
(Food) ..................................................86
q
(Special effects).................... 71, 87
4
(Night vision) ...................................88
V
(Super vivid) .....................................88
T
(Pop) ..................................................88
U
(Photo illustration).................. 89, 92
5
(Toy camera effect) .................89, 92
6
(Miniature effect) .................... 90, 93
7
(Selective color) .......................90, 94
1
(Silhouette).......................................91
2
(High key)..........................................91
3
(Low key)...........................................91
U
(Single frame) ...................... 131, 258
V
(Continuous L) .......................... 131
W
(Continuous H) ..........................131
X
(Continuous H (extended)) ..131
E
(Self-timer) ........................... 131, 134
L
(Silent photography).................... 67
x (Electronic front-curtain shutter)...
P
(Mechanical shutter)...................275
3
(Pinpoint AF) .................................. 54
d
(Single-point AF).......................... 54
e
(Dynamic-area AF)....................... 55
f
(Wide-area AF (S)) ....................... 55
g
(Wide-area AF (L))........................ 55
h
(Auto-area AF)............................... 55
L
(Matrix) ............................................127
M
(Center-weighted).......................127
N
(Spot) ...............................................127
t
(Highlight-weighted)................127
J
(Red-eye reduction) ...... 104, 125
L
(Slow sync)....................... 104, 125
M
(Rear-curtain sync) ........ 104, 125
E
(Exposure compensation)........... 98
K
button......................................48, 145
O
button........................................50, 164
G
button ........................................... 21
S
button..................................... 96, 97
A ( L
) button.....................20, 70, 100
W
button .........................20, 23, 145
X
button ............................. 20, 145, 162
i
button ........................................24, 110
J
button................................................ 21
I
(In-focus indicator)........................ 61
c
(Flash-ready indicator)................429
t
icon..................................................... 39
Numerics
1 : 1 (16 × 16) ......................................124
16 : 9 (24 × 14)....................................124
484 Technical Notes
A
Accessories ......................................... 431
Access-point mode.................348, 349
Active D-Lighting ............................. 129
ADL bracketing ................................. 221
AE bracketing .................................... 214
AE lock.........................................100, 101
AF .................................................... 51, 265
AF activation ...................................... 266
AF fine-tune........................................ 307
AF lock.........................................100, 101
AF speed.............................................. 299
AF tracking sensitivity .................... 299
AF-area mode .......................................54
AF-assist........................................ 42, 268
AF-C
............................................................52
AF-C priority selection.................... 265
AF-F
.................................................. 52, 144
AF-S
............................................................52
After delete......................................... 180
Airplane mode................................... 313
Android................................................ 373
Aperture .................................................73
Aperture-priority auto.......................73
Apply settings to live view............ 277
Attaching the lens...............................36
Attenuator .......................................... 260
Authentication/encryption........... 315
Auto (Set Picture Control) ............. 112
Auto (White balance) ............... 64, 116
Auto bracketing................................ 213
Auto c
ISO sensitivity control ...... 279
Auto distortion control .........207, 257
Auto FP high-speed sync............... 278
Auto ISO sensitivity control ... 97, 192
Auto send...................................318, 361
Auto-area AF .........................................55
Auto-area AF face/eye detection 265
Autoexposure lock..................100, 101
Autofocus..................................... 51, 265
Automatic display switch ...................8
B
Battery.............................................. 31, 32
Battery charger ...........................31, 454
Battery endurance............................458
Battery level .......................................... 34
Beep options ......................................312
Bluetooth.............................................373
Body cap .......................................36, 431
Bracketing order................................280
Built-in flash .................................29, 103
Bulb.......................................................... 76
C
Camera Control Pro 2 ......................436
Capture NX-D .................... 69, 388, 436
Center-weighted..................... 127, 271
Charge lamp ............................. 433, 434
Charging AC adapter....431, 433, 444
Charging the battery ......................... 31
Choose color temp. (White balance)
Choose image area...........................189
Choose start/end point ..................158
CL mode shooting speed...............274
Clock........................................................ 39
Clock battery ........................................ 39
Cloudy (White balance) ...........64, 116
Color space..........................................205
Color temperature........... 65, 118, 196
Command dial .............................. 9, 290
Compatible lenses.................. 416, 445
Conformity marking ........................320
Connect to computers....................347
Connect to PC .......................... 316, 387
Connect to smart device ................314
Connect to smart devices ..............365
Continuous..........................................258
Continuous H .....................................131
Continuous H (extended) ..............131
Technical Notes 485
Continuous L ..................................... 131
Continuous release mode.... 131, 258
Control ring ........................ 61, 460, 470
Copyright information ................... 311
CPU contacts............................. 460, 470
Creative Lighting System (CLS)... 426
Creative Picture Control ................ 112
Crop ...................................................... 155
Custom control assignment. 27, 282,
Custom controls ............................... 294
Custom controls (playback) ......... 288
Custom controls (shooting) ......... 282
Custom Picture Control201, 202, 256
Custom Settings ...................... 172, 261
Customize command dials ........... 290
Customize i
D
Date and time.................................... 303
Date format ........................................ 303
Daylight saving time....................... 303
DCF........................................................ 455
Default settings ....................... 167, 405
Delete ................................... 50, 164, 179
Delete all images.............................. 165
Delete current image............... 50, 164
Delete selected images.................. 165
Deselecting pictures ....................... 361
Diffraction compensation.... 207, 257
Diopter adjustment control .............. 7
Direct connection to PC................. 349
Direct sunlight (White balance) ....64,
Disconnecting and reconnecting ......
DISP
button.............................................18
Distortion control............................. 334
D-Lighting........................................... 332
Download center ................................. iv
DX .......................................................... 124
486 Technical Notes
Dynamic-area AF .......................55, 136
E
Easy connect.......................................354
Edit movie ................................. 158, 339
Electronic VR............................. 143, 259
Energy saving.....................................321
Error messages ........................ 412, 414
Errors (Wireless connections) .......386
Establish Wi-Fi connection............315
EV steps for exposure cntrl............270
Exif..........................................................455
Exposure .......................................98, 270
Exposure comp. for flash ...............279
Exposure compensation 98, 270, 279
Exposure data ....................................148
Exposure delay mode .....................274
Exposure indicator ............................. 75
Exposure lock ........................... 100, 101
Exposures remaining......................... 34
Extensions ...........................................189
External microphone............. 141, 432
Eye sensor.................................................7
Eye-detection AF................................. 57
F
Face-detection AF .............................. 57
File information.................................148
File naming ............................... 189, 254
File number sequence ....................276
Filter effects ........................................115
Fine-tune optimal exposure .........271
Fine-tuning white balance .. 117, 194
Firmware version ..............................322
Flash ................................... 125, 397, 426
Flash (White balance)...............65, 116
Flash compensation .............. 107, 212
Flash control............................. 209, 400
Flash mode................................ 104, 125
Flash off...................................... 105, 125
Flash pop-up control................29, 103
Flash ready indicator....................... 429
Flash shutter speed ......................... 279
Flash sync speed............................... 278
Flat (Set Picture Control)................ 112
Flexible program .................................72
Flick ..........................................................14
Flicker reduction......................208, 257
Fluorescent (White balance) . 64, 116
Fn1
button ..............................................27
Fn2
button ..............................................27
Focal length...............................462, 472
Focal length scale....................462, 472
Focal plane mark .................................62
Focus indicator.....................................61
Focus lock ..................................100, 101
Focus mode...........................................51
Format memory card ...................... 302
Frame rate..................................132, 139
Frame size/frame rate............139, 254
Framing grid display ....................... 277
Frequency response........................ 260
Full-frame playback........... 14, 48, 145
Function buttons.................................27
FV lock .........................................108, 430
H
I
HDMI .................................. 313, 395, 455
HDMI connector ............................... 395
HDMI recorders................................. 396
Help..........................................................23
Hi ...............................................................96
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......... 230
High ISO NR ...............................206, 256
Highlight display .............................. 300
Highlights............................62, 127, 149
Highlight-weighted......................... 127
Histogram ..................................149, 150
Image area .......................................... 189
Image comment ............................... 310
J
Image Dust Off ref photo...............308
Image overlay.....................................336
Image quality ........................... 122, 190
Image review............................ 146, 180
Image sensor ................................. 2, 441
Image size.................................. 124, 190
Incandescent (White balance)....... 64,
In-focus indicator................................ 61
Information display......... 18, 306, 420
Infrastructure mode............... 348, 353
Interval timer shooting...................235
iOS ..........................................................379
IP address................................... 317, 357
ISO sensitivity .................... 96, 192, 255
i-TTL ....................................399, 400, 426
JPEG .......................................................122
L
L
(large) .................................................124
Landscape (Set Picture Control)..112
Language.............................................302
Lens....................................... 36, 459, 469
Lens mount ........................................... 36
Lens mounting mark ......................... 36
Limit selectable image area ..........275
Location data ........................... 153, 313
Location data display ......................313
Long exposure NR ............................206
Low-light AF .......................................267
M
M
(medium) .........................................124
MAC address.......................................318
Main command dial..............................9
Manage Picture Control ....... 202, 256
Manual...........................................74, 400
Manual focus ................................. 52, 61
Manual focus ring in AF mode .....269
Technical Notes 487
Matrix metering................................ 127
Max. continuous release................ 274
Maximum aperture.......................... 429
Maximum sensitivity................ 97, 192
Memory buffer .................................. 133
Memory card...................... 32, 456, 457
Memory card capacity.................... 457
Menu guide........................................ 167
Metering.............................................. 127
MF
..............................................................52
Microphone............................... 141, 432
Microphone sensitivity ......... 141, 259
Miniature effect ...................................93
Minimum shutter speed................ 192
Mired .................................................... 196
Mode dial .......................................... 9, 71
Monitor .....................................5, 12, 417
Monitor brightness.......................... 303
Monitor mode button ......................... 8
Monitor pre-flash ............................. 109
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ...
Movie file type................................... 254
Movie quality............................ 139, 254
Movie shooting menu ........... 171, 253
Movie-record button .........................45
Movies.................................... 44, 48, 137
Multi selector........................................21
Multiple exposure............................ 223
My Menu ............................................. 341
N
Natural light auto (White balance) ....
NEF (RAW).................................. 122, 191
NEF (RAW) processing .................... 326
NEF (RAW) recording ...................... 191
Network settings............317, 349, 353
Neutral (Set Picture Control)........ 112
Number of focus points................. 266
Number of shots............................... 458
488 Technical Notes
O
OK button............................................288
Optical AWL .............................. 402, 404
Optical VR ......................... 135, 212, 259
Overview data....................................154
P
Pairing...................................................385
Peaking highlights ...........................277
Perspective control ..........................335
Photo Illustration ................................ 92
Photo information............................147
Photo shooting menu........... 168, 184
Photo/movie selector................. 40, 44
PictBridge .................................. 392, 455
Picture Controls.............. 112, 200, 256
PIN-entry WPS....................................354
Pinpoint AF ..................................54, 136
Playback .................................14, 48, 145
Playback display options ...............179
Playback folder ..................................179
Playback menu ........................ 167, 178
Playback zoom.................. 15, 150, 162
Portrait (Set Picture Control) ........112
Power off delay..................................273
Preset manual (White balance)..... 65,
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down .................................... 43
Press the shutter-release button
halfway ................................................. 42
Problems and solutions..................406
Product serial number .........................4
Programmed auto.............................. 72
Protecting photographs .................. 70
Push-button WPS .............................354
Q
Quick crop ...........................................155
Quick retouch ....................................332
Quick sharp......................................... 115
R
Rating ................................................... 183
Rear-curtain sync.....................104, 125
Recent settings.........................341, 345
Rechargeable Li-ion battery. 31, 431,
Red-eye correction .......................... 333
Red-eye reduction ..................104, 125
Release button to use dial............. 292
Release mode .................................... 131
Remote flash photography..397, 401
Remote photography ..................... 365
Removing the lens from the camera
Reset .........................185, 254, 264, 322
Reset all settings............................... 322
Reset custom settings .................... 264
Reset movie shooting menu ........ 254
Reset photo shooting menu ........ 185
Reset user settings.................... 79, 302
Resize.................................................... 330
Restoring default settings............. 405
Retouch menu................................... 323
Reverse indicators............................ 292
RGB ..................................... 149, 189, 205
Rotate tall...................................146, 181
S
S
(small) ................................................ 124
Same as photo settings.................. 137
Save current frame .......................... 161
Save user settings ..................... 78, 302
Scene mode ..........................................80
Search for Wi-Fi network ............... 354
Select date .................................165, 166
Select to send to smart device .... 157
Select to send/deselect.................. 157
Selecting pictures for upload....... 360
Selective color ......................................94
Self-portrait mode .....................13, 313
Self-timer ..........................131, 134, 272
Send while off ....................................315
Sensitivity .............................................. 96
Set Picture Control ........112, 200, 256
Setup menu .............................. 176, 301
Shade (White balance)....................116
Shooting data ....................................151
Shutter speed................................ 72, 74
Shutter type........................................275
Shutter-priority auto.......................... 72
Shutter-release button .............. 42, 43
Shutter-release button AE-L .........272
Side-by-side comparison ...............339
Silent photography...................67, 252
Single frame.............................. 131, 258
Single-point AF................. 54, 136, 144
Size............................................... 124, 190
Slide show ...........................................182
Slot empty release lock...................321
Slow sync ................................... 104, 125
Slow-motion movies........................140
Smart device....................128, 314, 365
SnapBridge...................................39, 365
Special effects mode ......................... 87
Specifications .....................................445
Spot........................................................127
SSID.....................................315, 349, 354
Standard (Set Picture Control) .....112
Standard i-TTL fill-flash ...................426
Standby timer .............................43, 273
Storage folder ....................................185
Straighten............................................333
Sub-command dial................................9
Subject tracking .................................. 58
T
Text entry......................................16, 186
Thumbnail ....................................15, 146
Tilting monitor........................................3
Time......................................................... 76
Technical Notes 489
Time zone ........................................... 303
Time zone and date......................... 303
Time-lapse movie............................. 245
Touch controls .................... 12, 59, 312
Touch screen ................................. 12, 59
Touch shutter ................................ 12, 59
Trademark Information.................. 481
Trim ....................................................... 329
Trim movie.......................................... 339
Trimming movies .................... 158, 339
Tripod......................................................76
Troubleshooting............................... 405
U
USB ........................................................ 392
User settings ............................... 78, 302
Using an on-camera flash ............. 398
V
View all in continuous mode ....... 277
Viewfinder ...................................... 7, 423
Viewfinder brightness .................... 304
Viewfinder color balance .............. 305
Viewfinder eyepiece ................... 7, 432
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ............... 432
Viewfinder focus.................................... 7
ViewNX-i.............................. 69, 388, 436
Vignette control ...................... 207, 257
Virtual horizon...............................18, 19
Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 112
Volume.......................................... 49, 312
W
WB (White balance).................. 63, 116
WB bracketing................................... 218
White balance ............................ 63, 116
Wide-area AF ..................... 55, 136, 144
Wi-Fi ............................................. 128, 347
Wi-Fi connection .............................. 316
Wi-Fi mode ......................................... 367
Wind noise reduction ..................... 260
490 Technical Notes
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options 319
Wireless Transmitter Utility...........347
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB9K02(11)
6MOA3011-02
/
Download
Just a friendly reminder. You can view the document right here. But most importantly, our AI has already read it. It can explain complex things in simple terms, answer your questions in any language, and help you quickly navigate even the longest or most compilcated documents.
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Advanced shooting options for capturing stunning images and videos
i Menu and menu guide for easy access to camera settings
Wireless connections to computers, smartphones, and tablets for easy sharing of photos and videos
Optional flash units for enhanced lighting control
Lightweight and compact design for easy portability
Frequently asked questions
The dimensions of the camera are not specified in the provided user manual.
The battery life of the camera is not specified in the provided user manual.
The maximum aperture of the lens is not specified in the provided user manual.
The minimum shutter speed of the camera is not specified in the provided user manual.
The maximum shutter speed of the camera is not specified in the provided user manual.
The ISO range of the camera is not specified in the provided user manual.
User questions
